Group
Guide to the Secure Configuration of SUSE Linux Enterprise 15
Group contains 90 groups and 201 rules |
Group
System Settings
Group contains 46 groups and 136 rules |
[ref]
Contains rules that check correct system settings. |
Group
Account and Access Control
Group contains 3 groups and 8 rules |
[ref]
In traditional Unix security, if an attacker gains
shell access to a certain login account, they can perform any action
or access any file to which that account has access. Therefore,
making it more difficult for unauthorized people to gain shell
access to accounts, particularly to privileged accounts, is a
necessary part of securing a system. This section introduces
mechanisms for restricting access to accounts under
SUSE Linux Enterprise 15. |
Group
Warning Banners for System Accesses
Group contains 1 group and 6 rules |
[ref]
Each system should expose as little information about
itself as possible.
System banners, which are typically displayed just before a
login prompt, give out information about the service or the host's
operating system. This might include the distribution name and the
system kernel version, and the particular version of a network
service. This information can assist intruders in gaining access to
the system as it can reveal whether the system is running
vulnerable software. Most network services can be configured to
limit what information is displayed.
Many organizations implement security policies that require a
system banner provide notice of the system's ownership, provide
warning to unauthorized users, and remind authorized users of their
consent to monitoring. |
Group
Implement a GUI Warning Banner
Group contains 2 rules |
[ref]
In the default graphical environment, users logging
directly into the system are greeted with a login screen provided
by the GNOME Display Manager (GDM). The warning banner should be
displayed in this graphical environment for these users.
The following sections describe how to configure the GDM login
banner. |
Rule
Enable GNOME3 Login Warning Banner
[ref] | In the default graphical environment, displaying a login warning banner
in the GNOME Display Manager's login screen can be enabled on the login
screen by setting banner-message-enable to true .
To enable, add or edit banner-message-enable to
/etc/dconf/db/gdm.d/00-security-settings . For example:
[org/gnome/login-screen]
banner-message-enable=true
Once the setting has been added, add a lock to
/etc/dconf/db/gdm.d/locks/00-security-settings-lock to prevent user modification.
For example:
/org/gnome/login-screen/banner-message-enable
After the settings have been set, run dconf update .
The banner text must also be set. | Rationale: | Display of a standardized and approved use notification before granting access to the operating system
ensures privacy and security notification verbiage used is consistent with applicable federal laws,
Executive Orders, directives, policies, regulations, standards, and guidance.
For U.S. Government systems, system use notifications are required only for access via login interfaces
with human users and are not required when such human interfaces do not exist. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_dconf_gnome_banner_enabled | Identifiers and References | References:
1, 12, 15, 16, DSS05.04, DSS05.10, DSS06.10, 3.1.9, CCI-000048, CCI-000050, CCI-001384, CCI-001385, CCI-001386, CCI-001387, CCI-001388, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.2, SR 1.5, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, A.18.1.4, A.9.2.1, A.9.2.4, A.9.3.1, A.9.4.2, A.9.4.3, AC-8(a), AC-8(b), AC-8(c), PR.AC-7, FMT_MOF_EXT.1, SRG-OS-000023-GPOS-00006, SRG-OS-000024-GPOS-00007, SRG-OS-000228-GPOS-00088 | |
|
Rule
Set the GNOME3 Login Warning Banner Text
[ref] | In the default graphical environment, configuring the login warning banner text
in the GNOME Display Manager's login screen can be configured on the login
screen by setting banner-message-text to string 'APPROVED_BANNER'
where APPROVED_BANNER is the approved banner for your environment.
To enable, add or edit banner-message-text to
/etc/dconf/db/gdm.d/00-security-settings . For example:
[org/gnome/login-screen]
banner-message-text='APPROVED_BANNER'
Once the setting has been added, add a lock to
/etc/dconf/db/gdm.d/locks/00-security-settings-lock to prevent user modification.
For example:
/org/gnome/login-screen/banner-message-text
After the settings have been set, run dconf update .
When entering a warning banner that spans several lines, remember
to begin and end the string with ' and use \n for new lines. | Rationale: | An appropriate warning message reinforces policy awareness during the logon
process and facilitates possible legal action against attackers. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_dconf_gnome_login_banner_text | Identifiers and References | References:
1, 12, 15, 16, DSS05.04, DSS05.10, DSS06.10, 3.1.9, CCI-000048, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.2, SR 1.5, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, A.18.1.4, A.9.2.1, A.9.2.4, A.9.3.1, A.9.4.2, A.9.4.3, AC-8(a), AC-8(c), PR.AC-7, FMT_MOF_EXT.1, SRG-OS-000023-GPOS-00006, SRG-OS-000024-GPOS-00007, SRG-OS-000228-GPOS-00088 | |
|
Rule
Verify permissions on Message of the Day Banner
[ref] |
To properly set the permissions of /etc/motd , run the command:
$ sudo chmod 0644 /etc/motd | Rationale: | Display of a standardized and approved use notification before granting
access to the operating system ensures privacy and security notification
verbiage used is consistent with applicable federal laws, Executive Orders,
directives, policies, regulations, standards, and guidance.
Proper permissions will ensure that only root user can modify the banner. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_permissions_etc_motd | Identifiers and References | | |
|
Rule
Verify permissions on System Login Banner
[ref] |
To properly set the permissions of /etc/issue , run the command:
$ sudo chmod 0644 /etc/issue | Rationale: | Display of a standardized and approved use notification before granting
access to the operating system ensures privacy and security notification
verbiage used is consistent with applicable federal laws, Executive Orders,
directives, policies, regulations, standards, and guidance.
Proper permissions will ensure that only root user can modify the banner. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_permissions_etc_issue | Identifiers and References | | |
|
Rule
Modify the System Login Banner
[ref] | To configure the system login banner edit /etc/issue . Replace the
default text with a message compliant with the local site policy or a legal
disclaimer.
The DoD required text is either:
You are accessing a U.S. Government (USG) Information System (IS) that
is provided for USG-authorized use only. By using this IS (which includes
any device attached to this IS), you consent to the following conditions:
-The USG routinely intercepts and monitors communications on this IS
for purposes including, but not limited to, penetration testing, COMSEC
monitoring, network operations and defense, personnel misconduct (PM), law
enforcement (LE), and counterintelligence (CI) investigations.
-At any time, the USG may inspect and seize data stored on this IS.
-Communications using, or data stored on, this IS are not private,
are subject to routine monitoring, interception, and search, and may be
disclosed or used for any USG-authorized purpose.
-This IS includes security measures (e.g., authentication and access
controls) to protect USG interests -- not for your personal benefit or
privacy.
-Notwithstanding the above, using this IS does not constitute consent
to PM, LE or CI investigative searching or monitoring of the content of
privileged communications, or work product, related to personal
representation or services by attorneys, psychotherapists, or clergy, and
their assistants. Such communications and work product are private and
confidential. See User Agreement for details.
OR:
I've read & consent to terms in IS user agreem't. | Rationale: | Display of a standardized and approved use notification before granting
access to the operating system ensures privacy and security notification
verbiage used is consistent with applicable federal laws, Executive Orders,
directives, policies, regulations, standards, and guidance.
System use notifications are required only for access via login interfaces
with human users and are not required when such human interfaces do not
exist. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_banner_etc_issue | Identifiers and References | References:
1, 12, 15, 16, DSS05.04, DSS05.10, DSS06.10, 3.1.9, CCI-000048, CCI-000050, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.2, SR 1.5, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, A.18.1.4, A.9.2.1, A.9.2.4, A.9.3.1, A.9.4.2, A.9.4.3, AC-8(a), AC-8(c), PR.AC-7, FMT_MOF_EXT.1, SRG-OS-000023-GPOS-00006, SRG-OS-000024-GPOS-00007, SRG-OS-000023-VMM-000060, SRG-OS-000024-VMM-000070 | |
|
Rule
Modify the System Message of the Day Banner
[ref] | To configure the system message banner edit /etc/motd . Replace the
default text with a message compliant with the local site policy or a legal
disclaimer.
The DoD required text is either:
You are accessing a U.S. Government (USG) Information System (IS) that
is provided for USG-authorized use only. By using this IS (which includes
any device attached to this IS), you consent to the following conditions:
-The USG routinely intercepts and monitors communications on this IS
for purposes including, but not limited to, penetration testing, COMSEC
monitoring, network operations and defense, personnel misconduct (PM), law
enforcement (LE), and counterintelligence (CI) investigations.
-At any time, the USG may inspect and seize data stored on this IS.
-Communications using, or data stored on, this IS are not private,
are subject to routine monitoring, interception, and search, and may be
disclosed or used for any USG-authorized purpose.
-This IS includes security measures (e.g., authentication and access
controls) to protect USG interests -- not for your personal benefit or
privacy.
-Notwithstanding the above, using this IS does not constitute consent
to PM, LE or CI investigative searching or monitoring of the content of
privileged communications, or work product, related to personal
representation or services by attorneys, psychotherapists, or clergy, and
their assistants. Such communications and work product are private and
confidential. See User Agreement for details.
OR:
I've read & consent to terms in IS user agreem't. | Rationale: | Display of a standardized and approved use notification before granting
access to the operating system ensures privacy and security notification
verbiage used is consistent with applicable federal laws, Executive Orders,
directives, policies, regulations, standards, and guidance.
System use notifications are required only for access via login interfaces
with human users and are not required when such human interfaces do not
exist. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_banner_etc_motd | Identifiers and References | | |
|
Group
Protect Physical Console Access
Group contains 2 rules |
[ref]
It is impossible to fully protect a system from an
attacker with physical access, so securing the space in which the
system is located should be considered a necessary step. However,
there are some steps which, if taken, make it more difficult for an
attacker to quickly or undetectably modify a system from its
console. |
Rule
Require Authentication for Single User Mode
[ref] | Single-user mode is intended as a system recovery
method, providing a single user root access to the system by
providing a boot option at startup. By default, no authentication
is performed if single-user mode is selected.
By default, single-user mode is protected by requiring a password and is set
in /usr/lib/systemd/system/rescue.service . | Rationale: | This prevents attackers with physical access from trivially bypassing security
on the machine and gaining root access. Such accesses are further prevented
by configuring the bootloader password. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_require_singleuser_auth | Identifiers and References | References:
1, 11, 12, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, DSS05.02, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS05.10, DSS06.03, DSS06.06, DSS06.10, 3.1.1, 3.4.5, CCI-000213, 164.308(a)(1)(ii)(B), 164.308(a)(7)(i), 164.308(a)(7)(ii)(A), 164.310(a)(1), 164.310(a)(2)(i), 164.310(a)(2)(ii), 164.310(a)(2)(iii), 164.310(b), 164.310(c), 164.310(d)(1), 164.310(d)(2)(iii), 4.3.3.2.2, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, A.18.1.4, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.1, A.9.2.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.2.4, A.9.2.6, A.9.3.1, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.2, A.9.4.3, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, IA-2, AC-3, CM-6(a), PR.AC-1, PR.AC-4, PR.AC-6, PR.AC-7, PR.PT-3, FIA_AFL.1, SRG-OS-000080-GPOS-00048 | |
|
Rule
Require Authentication for Emergency Systemd Target
[ref] | Emergency mode is intended as a system recovery
method, providing a single user root access to the system
during a failed boot sequence.
By default, Emergency mode is protected by requiring a password and is set
in /usr/lib/systemd/system/emergency.service . | Rationale: | This prevents attackers with physical access from trivially bypassing security
on the machine and gaining root access. Such accesses are further prevented
by configuring the bootloader password. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_require_emergency_target_auth | Identifiers and References | References:
1, 11, 12, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, DSS05.02, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS05.10, DSS06.03, DSS06.06, DSS06.10, 3.1.1, 3.4.5, CCI-000213, 164.308(a)(1)(ii)(B), 164.308(a)(7)(i), 164.308(a)(7)(ii)(A), 164.310(a)(1), 164.310(a)(2)(i), 164.310(a)(2)(ii), 164.310(a)(2)(iii), 164.310(b), 164.310(c), 164.310(d)(1), 164.310(d)(2)(iii), 4.3.3.2.2, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, A.18.1.4, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.1, A.9.2.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.2.4, A.9.2.6, A.9.3.1, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.2, A.9.4.3, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, IA-2, AC-3, CM-6(a), PR.AC-1, PR.AC-4, PR.AC-6, PR.AC-7, PR.PT-3, FIA_AFL.1, SRG-OS-000080-GPOS-00048 | |
|
Group
System Accounting with auditd
Group contains 4 groups and 20 rules |
[ref]
The audit service provides substantial capabilities
for recording system activities. By default, the service audits about
SELinux AVC denials and certain types of security-relevant events
such as system logins, account modifications, and authentication
events performed by programs such as sudo.
Under its default configuration, auditd has modest disk space
requirements, and should not noticeably impact system performance.
NOTE: The Linux Audit daemon auditd can be configured to use
the augenrules program to read audit rules files (*.rules )
located in /etc/audit/rules.d location and compile them to create
the resulting form of the /etc/audit/audit.rules configuration file
during the daemon startup (default configuration). Alternatively, the auditd
daemon can use the auditctl utility to read audit rules from the
/etc/audit/audit.rules configuration file during daemon startup,
and load them into the kernel. The expected behavior is configured via the
appropriate ExecStartPost directive setting in the
/usr/lib/systemd/system/auditd.service configuration file.
To instruct the auditd daemon to use the augenrules program
to read audit rules (default configuration), use the following setting:
ExecStartPost=-/sbin/augenrules --load
in the /usr/lib/systemd/system/auditd.service configuration file.
In order to instruct the auditd daemon to use the auditctl
utility to read audit rules, use the following setting:
ExecStartPost=-/sbin/auditctl -R /etc/audit/audit.rules
in the /usr/lib/systemd/system/auditd.service configuration file.
Refer to [Service] section of the /usr/lib/systemd/system/auditd.service
configuration file for further details.
Government networks often have substantial auditing
requirements and auditd can be configured to meet these
requirements.
Examining some example audit records demonstrates how the Linux audit system
satisfies common requirements.
The following example from Fedora Documentation available at
https://access.redhat.com/documentation/en-US/Red_Hat_Enterprise_Linux/7/html/SELinux_Users_and_Administrators_Guide/sect-Security-Enhanced_Linux-Troubleshooting-Fixing_Problems.html#sect-Security-Enhanced_Linux-Fixing_Problems-Raw_Audit_Messages
shows the substantial amount of information captured in a
two typical "raw" audit messages, followed by a breakdown of the most important
fields. In this example the message is SELinux-related and reports an AVC
denial (and the associated system call) that occurred when the Apache HTTP
Server attempted to access the /var/www/html/file1 file (labeled with
the samba_share_t type):
type=AVC msg=audit(1226874073.147:96): avc: denied { getattr } for pid=2465 comm="httpd"
path="/var/www/html/file1" dev=dm-0 ino=284133 scontext=unconfined_u:system_r:httpd_t:s0
tcontext=unconfined_u:object_r:samba_share_t:s0 tclass=file
type=SYSCALL msg=audit(1226874073.147:96): arch=40000003 syscall=196 success=no exit=-13
a0=b98df198 a1=bfec85dc a2=54dff4 a3=2008171 items=0 ppid=2463 pid=2465 auid=502 uid=48
gid=48 euid=48 suid=48 fsuid=48 egid=48 sgid=48 fsgid=48 tty=(none) ses=6 comm="httpd"
exe="/usr/sbin/httpd" subj=unconfined_u:system_r:httpd_t:s0 key=(null)
msg=audit(1226874073.147:96) - The number in parentheses is the unformatted time stamp (Epoch time)
for the event, which can be converted to standard time by using the
date command.
{ getattr } - The item in braces indicates the permission that was denied.
getattr
indicates the source process was trying to read the target file's status information.
This occurs before reading files. This action is denied due to the file being
accessed having the wrong label. Commonly seen permissions include getattr ,
read , and write .
comm="httpd" - The executable that launched the process. The full path of the executable is
found in the
exe= section of the system call (SYSCALL ) message,
which in this case, is exe="/usr/sbin/httpd" .
path="/var/www/html/file1" - The path to the object (target) the process attempted to access.
scontext="unconfined_u:system_r:httpd_t:s0" - The SELinux context of the process that attempted the denied action. In
this case, it is the SELinux context of the Apache HTTP Server, which is running
in the
httpd_t domain.
tcontext="unconfined_u:object_r:samba_share_t:s0" - The SELinux context of the object (target) the process attempted to access.
In this case, it is the SELinux context of
file1 . Note: the samba_share_t
type is not accessible to processes running in the httpd_t domain.
- From the system call (
SYSCALL ) message, two items are of interest:
success=no : indicates whether the denial (AVC) was enforced or not.
success=no indicates the system call was not successful (SELinux denied
access). success=yes indicates the system call was successful - this can
be seen for permissive domains or unconfined domains, such as initrc_t
and kernel_t .
exe="/usr/sbin/httpd" : the full path to the executable that launched
the process, which in this case, is exe="/usr/sbin/httpd" .
|
Group
Configure auditd Data Retention
Group contains 5 rules |
[ref]
The audit system writes data to /var/log/audit/audit.log . By default,
auditd rotates 5 logs by size (6MB), retaining a maximum of 30MB of
data in total, and refuses to write entries when the disk is too
full. This minimizes the risk of audit data filling its partition
and impacting other services. This also minimizes the risk of the audit
daemon temporarily disabling the system if it cannot write audit log (which
it can be configured to do).
For a busy
system or a system which is thoroughly auditing system activity, the default settings
for data retention may be
insufficient. The log file size needed will depend heavily on what types
of events are being audited. First configure auditing to log all the events of
interest. Then monitor the log size manually for awhile to determine what file
size will allow you to keep the required data for the correct time period.
Using a dedicated partition for /var/log/audit prevents the
auditd logs from disrupting system functionality if they fill, and,
more importantly, prevents other activity in /var from filling the
partition and stopping the audit trail. (The audit logs are size-limited and
therefore unlikely to grow without bound unless configured to do so.) Some
machines may have requirements that no actions occur which cannot be audited.
If this is the case, then auditd can be configured to halt the machine
if it runs out of space. Note: Since older logs are rotated,
configuring auditd this way does not prevent older logs from being
rotated away before they can be viewed.
If your system is configured to halt when logging cannot be performed, make
sure this can never happen under normal circumstances! Ensure that
/var/log/audit is on its own partition, and that this partition is
larger than the maximum amount of data auditd will retain
normally. |
Rule
Configure auditd mail_acct Action on Low Disk Space
[ref] | The auditd service can be configured to send email to
a designated account in certain situations. Add or correct the following line
in /etc/audit/auditd.conf to ensure that administrators are notified
via email for those situations:
action_mail_acct = root | Rationale: | Email sent to the root account is typically aliased to the
administrators of the system, who can take appropriate action. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_auditd_data_retention_action_mail_acct | Identifiers and References | References:
1, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 19, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 5.4.1.1, APO11.04, APO12.06, APO13.01, BAI03.05, BAI04.04, BAI08.02, DSS02.02, DSS02.04, DSS02.07, DSS03.01, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, MEA02.01, 3.3.1, CCI-000139, CCI-001855, 164.312(a)(2)(ii), 4.2.3.10, 4.3.3.3.9, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.4.4.7, 4.3.4.5.6, 4.3.4.5.7, 4.3.4.5.8, 4.4.2.1, 4.4.2.2, 4.4.2.4, SR 2.10, SR 2.11, SR 2.12, SR 2.8, SR 2.9, SR 6.1, SR 7.1, SR 7.2, A.12.1.3, A.12.4.1, A.12.4.2, A.12.4.3, A.12.4.4, A.12.7.1, A.16.1.4, A.16.1.5, A.16.1.7, A.17.2.1, IA-5(1), AU-5(a), AU-5(2), CM-6(a), DE.AE-3, DE.AE-5, PR.DS-4, PR.PT-1, RS.AN-1, RS.AN-4, Req-10.7.a, SRG-OS-000343-GPOS-00134, SRG-OS-000046-VMM-000210, SRG-OS-000343-VMM-001240 | |
|
Rule
Configure auditd space_left Action on Low Disk Space
[ref] | The auditd service can be configured to take an action
when disk space starts to run low.
Edit the file /etc/audit/auditd.conf . Modify the following line,
substituting ACTION appropriately:
space_left_action = ACTION
Possible values for ACTION are described in the auditd.conf man page.
These include:
syslog email exec suspend single halt
Set this to email (instead of the default,
which is suspend ) as it is more likely to get prompt attention. Acceptable values
also include suspend , single , and halt . | Rationale: | Notifying administrators of an impending disk space problem may
allow them to take corrective action prior to any disruption. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_auditd_data_retention_space_left_action | Identifiers and References | References:
1, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 19, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 5.4.1.1, APO11.04, APO12.06, APO13.01, BAI03.05, BAI04.04, BAI08.02, DSS02.02, DSS02.04, DSS02.07, DSS03.01, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, MEA02.01, 3.3.1, CCI-001855, 164.312(a)(2)(ii), 4.2.3.10, 4.3.3.3.9, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.4.4.7, 4.3.4.5.6, 4.3.4.5.7, 4.3.4.5.8, 4.4.2.1, 4.4.2.2, 4.4.2.4, SR 2.10, SR 2.11, SR 2.12, SR 2.8, SR 2.9, SR 6.1, SR 7.1, SR 7.2, A.12.1.3, A.12.4.1, A.12.4.2, A.12.4.3, A.12.4.4, A.12.7.1, A.16.1.4, A.16.1.5, A.16.1.7, A.17.2.1, AU-5(b), AU-5(2), AU-5(1), AU-5(4), CM-6(a), DE.AE-3, DE.AE-5, PR.DS-4, PR.PT-1, RS.AN-1, RS.AN-4, Req-10.7, SRG-OS-000343-GPOS-00134, SRG-OS-000343-VMM-001240 | |
|
Rule
Configure auditd max_log_file_action Upon Reaching Maximum Log Size
[ref] | The default action to take when the logs reach their maximum size
is to rotate the log files, discarding the oldest one. To configure the action taken
by auditd , add or correct the line in /etc/audit/auditd.conf :
max_log_file_action = ACTION
Possible values for ACTION are described in the auditd.conf man
page. These include:
syslog suspend rotate keep_logs
Set the ACTION to rotate to ensure log rotation
occurs. This is the default. The setting is case-insensitive. | Rationale: | Automatically rotating logs (by setting this to rotate )
minimizes the chances of the system unexpectedly running out of disk space by
being overwhelmed with log data. However, for systems that must never discard
log data, or which use external processes to transfer it and reclaim space,
keep_logs can be employed. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_auditd_data_retention_max_log_file_action | Identifiers and References | References:
1, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 19, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 5.4.1.1, APO11.04, APO12.06, APO13.01, BAI03.05, BAI04.04, BAI08.02, DSS02.02, DSS02.04, DSS02.07, DSS03.01, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, MEA02.01, 164.312(a)(2)(ii), 4.2.3.10, 4.3.3.3.9, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.4.4.7, 4.3.4.5.6, 4.3.4.5.7, 4.3.4.5.8, 4.4.2.1, 4.4.2.2, 4.4.2.4, SR 2.10, SR 2.11, SR 2.12, SR 2.8, SR 2.9, SR 6.1, SR 7.1, SR 7.2, A.12.1.3, A.12.4.1, A.12.4.2, A.12.4.3, A.12.4.4, A.12.7.1, A.16.1.4, A.16.1.5, A.16.1.7, A.17.2.1, AU-5(b), AU-5(2), AU-5(1), AU-5(4), CM-6(a), DE.AE-3, DE.AE-5, PR.DS-4, PR.PT-1, RS.AN-1, RS.AN-4, Req-10.7 | |
|
Rule
Configure auditd Max Log File Size
[ref] | Determine the amount of audit data (in megabytes)
which should be retained in each log file. Edit the file
/etc/audit/auditd.conf . Add or modify the following line, substituting
the correct value of 6 for STOREMB:
max_log_file = STOREMB
Set the value to 6 (MB) or higher for general-purpose systems.
Larger values, of course,
support retention of even more audit data. | Rationale: | The total storage for audit log files must be large enough to retain
log information over the period required. This is a function of the maximum
log file size and the number of logs retained. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_auditd_data_retention_max_log_file | Identifiers and References | References:
1, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 19, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 5.4.1.1, APO11.04, APO12.06, BAI03.05, BAI08.02, DSS02.02, DSS02.04, DSS02.07, DSS03.01, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, MEA02.01, 4.2.3.10, 4.3.3.3.9, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.4.4.7, 4.3.4.5.6, 4.3.4.5.7, 4.3.4.5.8, 4.4.2.1, 4.4.2.2, 4.4.2.4, SR 2.10, SR 2.11, SR 2.12, SR 2.8, SR 2.9, SR 6.1, A.12.4.1, A.12.4.2, A.12.4.3, A.12.4.4, A.12.7.1, A.16.1.4, A.16.1.5, A.16.1.7, AU-11, CM-6(a), DE.AE-3, DE.AE-5, PR.PT-1, RS.AN-1, RS.AN-4, Req-10.7 | |
|
Rule
Configure auditd admin_space_left Action on Low Disk Space
[ref] | The auditd service can be configured to take an action
when disk space is running low but prior to running out of space completely.
Edit the file /etc/audit/auditd.conf . Add or modify the following line,
substituting ACTION appropriately:
admin_space_left_action = ACTION
Set this value to single to cause the system to switch to single user
mode for corrective action. Acceptable values also include suspend and
halt . For certain systems, the need for availability
outweighs the need to log all actions, and a different setting should be
determined. Details regarding all possible values for ACTION are described in the
auditd.conf man page. | Rationale: | Administrators should be made aware of an inability to record
audit records. If a separate partition or logical volume of adequate size
is used, running low on space for audit records should never occur. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_auditd_data_retention_admin_space_left_action | Identifiers and References | References:
1, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 19, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 5.4.1.1, APO11.04, APO12.06, APO13.01, BAI03.05, BAI04.04, BAI08.02, DSS02.02, DSS02.04, DSS02.07, DSS03.01, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, MEA02.01, 3.3.1, CCI-000140, CCI-001343, CCI-001855, 164.312(a)(2)(ii), 4.2.3.10, 4.3.3.3.9, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.4.4.7, 4.3.4.5.6, 4.3.4.5.7, 4.3.4.5.8, 4.4.2.1, 4.4.2.2, 4.4.2.4, SR 2.10, SR 2.11, SR 2.12, SR 2.8, SR 2.9, SR 6.1, SR 7.1, SR 7.2, A.12.1.3, A.12.4.1, A.12.4.2, A.12.4.3, A.12.4.4, A.12.7.1, A.16.1.4, A.16.1.5, A.16.1.7, A.17.2.1, AU-5(b), AU-5(2), AU-5(1), AU-5(4), CM-6(a), DE.AE-3, DE.AE-5, PR.DS-4, PR.PT-1, RS.AN-1, RS.AN-4, Req-10.7, SRG-OS-000343-GPOS-00134 | |
|
Group
Configure auditd Rules for Comprehensive Auditing
Group contains 2 groups and 11 rules |
[ref]
The auditd program can perform comprehensive
monitoring of system activity. This section describes recommended
configuration settings for comprehensive auditing, but a full
description of the auditing system's capabilities is beyond the
scope of this guide. The mailing list linux-audit@redhat.com exists
to facilitate community discussion of the auditing system.
The audit subsystem supports extensive collection of events, including:
- Tracing of arbitrary system calls (identified by name or number)
on entry or exit.
- Filtering by PID, UID, call success, system call argument (with
some limitations), etc.
- Monitoring of specific files for modifications to the file's
contents or metadata.
Auditing rules at startup are controlled by the file /etc/audit/audit.rules .
Add rules to it to meet the auditing requirements for your organization.
Each line in /etc/audit/audit.rules represents a series of arguments
that can be passed to auditctl and can be individually tested
during runtime. See documentation in /usr/share/doc/audit-VERSION and
in the related man pages for more details.
If copying any example audit rulesets from /usr/share/doc/audit-VERSION ,
be sure to comment out the
lines containing arch= which are not appropriate for your system's
architecture. Then review and understand the following rules,
ensuring rules are activated as needed for the appropriate
architecture.
After reviewing all the rules, reading the following sections, and
editing as needed, the new rules can be activated as follows:
$ sudo service auditd restart |
Group
Records Events that Modify Date and Time Information
Group contains 5 rules |
[ref]
Arbitrary changes to the system time can be used to obfuscate
nefarious activities in log files, as well as to confuse network services that
are highly dependent upon an accurate system time. All changes to the system
time should be audited. |
Rule
Record attempts to alter time through adjtimex
[ref] | If the auditd daemon is configured to use the
augenrules program to read audit rules during daemon startup (the
default), add the following line to a file with suffix .rules in the
directory /etc/audit/rules.d :
-a always,exit -F arch=b32 -S adjtimex -F key=audit_time_rules
If the system is 64 bit then also add the following line:
-a always,exit -F arch=b64 -S adjtimex -F key=audit_time_rules
If the auditd daemon is configured to use the auditctl
utility to read audit rules during daemon startup, add the following line to
/etc/audit/audit.rules file:
-a always,exit -F arch=b32 -S adjtimex -F key=audit_time_rules
If the system is 64 bit then also add the following line:
-a always,exit -F arch=b64 -S adjtimex -F key=audit_time_rules
The -k option allows for the specification of a key in string form that can be
used for better reporting capability through ausearch and aureport. Multiple
system calls can be defined on the same line to save space if desired, but is
not required. See an example of multiple combined syscalls:
-a always,exit -F arch=b64 -S adjtimex,settimeofday -F key=audit_time_rules | Rationale: | Arbitrary changes to the system time can be used to obfuscate
nefarious activities in log files, as well as to confuse network services that
are highly dependent upon an accurate system time (such as sshd). All changes
to the system time should be audited. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_audit_rules_time_adjtimex | Identifiers and References | References:
1, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 19, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 5.4.1.1, APO10.01, APO10.03, APO10.04, APO10.05, APO11.04, APO12.06, APO13.01, BAI03.05, BAI08.02, DSS01.03, DSS01.04, DSS02.02, DSS02.04, DSS02.07, DSS03.01, DSS03.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.03, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, MEA01.01, MEA01.02, MEA01.03, MEA01.04, MEA01.05, MEA02.01, 3.1.7, CCI-001487, CCI-000169, 164.308(a)(1)(ii)(D), 164.308(a)(3)(ii)(A), 164.308(a)(5)(ii)(C), 164.312(a)(2)(i), 164.312(b), 164.312(d), 164.312(e), 4.2.3.10, 4.3.2.6.7, 4.3.3.3.9, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.4.4.7, 4.3.4.5.6, 4.3.4.5.7, 4.3.4.5.8, 4.4.2.1, 4.4.2.2, 4.4.2.4, SR 1.13, SR 2.10, SR 2.11, SR 2.12, SR 2.6, SR 2.8, SR 2.9, SR 3.1, SR 3.5, SR 3.8, SR 4.1, SR 4.3, SR 5.1, SR 5.2, SR 5.3, SR 6.1, SR 6.2, SR 7.1, SR 7.6, A.11.2.6, A.12.4.1, A.12.4.2, A.12.4.3, A.12.4.4, A.12.7.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.2.1, A.14.1.3, A.14.2.7, A.15.2.1, A.15.2.2, A.16.1.4, A.16.1.5, A.16.1.7, A.6.2.1, A.6.2.2, AU-2(d), AU-12(c), AC-6(9), CM-6(a), DE.AE-3, DE.AE-5, DE.CM-1, DE.CM-3, DE.CM-7, ID.SC-4, PR.AC-3, PR.PT-1, PR.PT-4, RS.AN-1, RS.AN-4, Req-10.4.2.b | |
|
Rule
Record Attempts to Alter Time Through stime
[ref] | If the auditd daemon is configured to use the
augenrules program to read audit rules during daemon startup (the
default), add the following line to a file with suffix .rules in the
directory /etc/audit/rules.d for both 32 bit and 64 bit systems:
-a always,exit -F arch=b32 -S stime -F key=audit_time_rules
Since the 64 bit version of the "stime" system call is not defined in the audit
lookup table, the corresponding "-F arch=b64" form of this rule is not expected
to be defined on 64 bit systems (the aforementioned "-F arch=b32" stime rule
form itself is sufficient for both 32 bit and 64 bit systems). If the
auditd daemon is configured to use the auditctl utility to
read audit rules during daemon startup, add the following line to
/etc/audit/audit.rules file for both 32 bit and 64 bit systems:
-a always,exit -F arch=b32 -S stime -F key=audit_time_rules
Since the 64 bit version of the "stime" system call is not defined in the audit
lookup table, the corresponding "-F arch=b64" form of this rule is not expected
to be defined on 64 bit systems (the aforementioned "-F arch=b32" stime rule
form itself is sufficient for both 32 bit and 64 bit systems). The -k option
allows for the specification of a key in string form that can be used for
better reporting capability through ausearch and aureport. Multiple system
calls can be defined on the same line to save space if desired, but is not
required. See an example of multiple combined system calls:
-a always,exit -F arch=b64 -S adjtimex,settimeofday -F key=audit_time_rules | Rationale: | Arbitrary changes to the system time can be used to obfuscate
nefarious activities in log files, as well as to confuse network services that
are highly dependent upon an accurate system time (such as sshd). All changes
to the system time should be audited. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_audit_rules_time_stime | Identifiers and References | References:
1, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 19, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 5.4.1.1, APO10.01, APO10.03, APO10.04, APO10.05, APO11.04, APO12.06, APO13.01, BAI03.05, BAI08.02, DSS01.03, DSS01.04, DSS02.02, DSS02.04, DSS02.07, DSS03.01, DSS03.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.03, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, MEA01.01, MEA01.02, MEA01.03, MEA01.04, MEA01.05, MEA02.01, 3.1.7, CCI-001487, CCI-000169, 164.308(a)(1)(ii)(D), 164.308(a)(3)(ii)(A), 164.308(a)(5)(ii)(C), 164.312(a)(2)(i), 164.312(b), 164.312(d), 164.312(e), 4.2.3.10, 4.3.2.6.7, 4.3.3.3.9, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.4.4.7, 4.3.4.5.6, 4.3.4.5.7, 4.3.4.5.8, 4.4.2.1, 4.4.2.2, 4.4.2.4, SR 1.13, SR 2.10, SR 2.11, SR 2.12, SR 2.6, SR 2.8, SR 2.9, SR 3.1, SR 3.5, SR 3.8, SR 4.1, SR 4.3, SR 5.1, SR 5.2, SR 5.3, SR 6.1, SR 6.2, SR 7.1, SR 7.6, A.11.2.6, A.12.4.1, A.12.4.2, A.12.4.3, A.12.4.4, A.12.7.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.2.1, A.14.1.3, A.14.2.7, A.15.2.1, A.15.2.2, A.16.1.4, A.16.1.5, A.16.1.7, A.6.2.1, A.6.2.2, AU-2(d), AU-12(c), AC-6(9), CM-6(a), DE.AE-3, DE.AE-5, DE.CM-1, DE.CM-3, DE.CM-7, ID.SC-4, PR.AC-3, PR.PT-1, PR.PT-4, RS.AN-1, RS.AN-4, Req-10.4.2.b | |
|
Rule
Record Attempts to Alter the localtime File
[ref] | If the auditd daemon is configured to use the
augenrules program to read audit rules during daemon startup (the default),
add the following line to a file with suffix .rules in the directory
/etc/audit/rules.d :
-w /etc/localtime -p wa -k audit_time_rules
If the auditd daemon is configured to use the auditctl
utility to read audit rules during daemon startup, add the following line to
/etc/audit/audit.rules file:
-w /etc/localtime -p wa -k audit_time_rules
The -k option allows for the specification of a key in string form that can
be used for better reporting capability through ausearch and aureport and
should always be used. | Rationale: | Arbitrary changes to the system time can be used to obfuscate
nefarious activities in log files, as well as to confuse network services that
are highly dependent upon an accurate system time (such as sshd). All changes
to the system time should be audited. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_audit_rules_time_watch_localtime | Identifiers and References | References:
1, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 19, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 5.4.1.1, APO10.01, APO10.03, APO10.04, APO10.05, APO11.04, APO12.06, APO13.01, BAI03.05, BAI08.02, DSS01.03, DSS01.04, DSS02.02, DSS02.04, DSS02.07, DSS03.01, DSS03.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.03, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, MEA01.01, MEA01.02, MEA01.03, MEA01.04, MEA01.05, MEA02.01, 3.1.7, CCI-001487, CCI-000169, 164.308(a)(1)(ii)(D), 164.308(a)(3)(ii)(A), 164.308(a)(5)(ii)(C), 164.312(a)(2)(i), 164.312(b), 164.312(d), 164.312(e), 4.2.3.10, 4.3.2.6.7, 4.3.3.3.9, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.4.4.7, 4.3.4.5.6, 4.3.4.5.7, 4.3.4.5.8, 4.4.2.1, 4.4.2.2, 4.4.2.4, SR 1.13, SR 2.10, SR 2.11, SR 2.12, SR 2.6, SR 2.8, SR 2.9, SR 3.1, SR 3.5, SR 3.8, SR 4.1, SR 4.3, SR 5.1, SR 5.2, SR 5.3, SR 6.1, SR 6.2, SR 7.1, SR 7.6, A.11.2.6, A.12.4.1, A.12.4.2, A.12.4.3, A.12.4.4, A.12.7.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.2.1, A.14.1.3, A.14.2.7, A.15.2.1, A.15.2.2, A.16.1.4, A.16.1.5, A.16.1.7, A.6.2.1, A.6.2.2, AU-2(d), AU-12(c), AC-6(9), CM-6(a), DE.AE-3, DE.AE-5, DE.CM-1, DE.CM-3, DE.CM-7, ID.SC-4, PR.AC-3, PR.PT-1, PR.PT-4, RS.AN-1, RS.AN-4, Req-10.4.2.b | |
|
Rule
Record attempts to alter time through settimeofday
[ref] | If the auditd daemon is configured to use the
augenrules program to read audit rules during daemon startup (the
default), add the following line to a file with suffix .rules in the
directory /etc/audit/rules.d :
-a always,exit -F arch=b32 -S settimeofday -F key=audit_time_rules
If the system is 64 bit then also add the following line:
-a always,exit -F arch=b64 -S settimeofday -F key=audit_time_rules
If the auditd daemon is configured to use the auditctl
utility to read audit rules during daemon startup, add the following line to
/etc/audit/audit.rules file:
-a always,exit -F arch=b32 -S settimeofday -F key=audit_time_rules
If the system is 64 bit then also add the following line:
-a always,exit -F arch=b64 -S settimeofday -F key=audit_time_rules
The -k option allows for the specification of a key in string form that can be
used for better reporting capability through ausearch and aureport. Multiple
system calls can be defined on the same line to save space if desired, but is
not required. See an example of multiple combined syscalls:
-a always,exit -F arch=b64 -S adjtimex,settimeofday -F key=audit_time_rules | Rationale: | Arbitrary changes to the system time can be used to obfuscate
nefarious activities in log files, as well as to confuse network services that
are highly dependent upon an accurate system time (such as sshd). All changes
to the system time should be audited. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_audit_rules_time_settimeofday | Identifiers and References | References:
1, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 19, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 5.4.1.1, APO10.01, APO10.03, APO10.04, APO10.05, APO11.04, APO12.06, APO13.01, BAI03.05, BAI08.02, DSS01.03, DSS01.04, DSS02.02, DSS02.04, DSS02.07, DSS03.01, DSS03.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.03, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, MEA01.01, MEA01.02, MEA01.03, MEA01.04, MEA01.05, MEA02.01, 3.1.7, CCI-001487, CCI-000169, 164.308(a)(1)(ii)(D), 164.308(a)(3)(ii)(A), 164.308(a)(5)(ii)(C), 164.312(a)(2)(i), 164.312(b), 164.312(d), 164.312(e), 4.2.3.10, 4.3.2.6.7, 4.3.3.3.9, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.4.4.7, 4.3.4.5.6, 4.3.4.5.7, 4.3.4.5.8, 4.4.2.1, 4.4.2.2, 4.4.2.4, SR 1.13, SR 2.10, SR 2.11, SR 2.12, SR 2.6, SR 2.8, SR 2.9, SR 3.1, SR 3.5, SR 3.8, SR 4.1, SR 4.3, SR 5.1, SR 5.2, SR 5.3, SR 6.1, SR 6.2, SR 7.1, SR 7.6, A.11.2.6, A.12.4.1, A.12.4.2, A.12.4.3, A.12.4.4, A.12.7.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.2.1, A.14.1.3, A.14.2.7, A.15.2.1, A.15.2.2, A.16.1.4, A.16.1.5, A.16.1.7, A.6.2.1, A.6.2.2, AU-2(d), AU-12(c), AC-6(9), CM-6(a), DE.AE-3, DE.AE-5, DE.CM-1, DE.CM-3, DE.CM-7, ID.SC-4, PR.AC-3, PR.PT-1, PR.PT-4, RS.AN-1, RS.AN-4, Req-10.4.2.b | |
|
Rule
Record Attempts to Alter Time Through clock_settime
[ref] | If the auditd daemon is configured to use the
augenrules program to read audit rules during daemon startup (the
default), add the following line to a file with suffix .rules in the
directory /etc/audit/rules.d :
-a always,exit -F arch=b32 -S clock_settime -F a0=0x0 -F key=time-change
If the system is 64 bit then also add the following line:
-a always,exit -F arch=b64 -S clock_settime -F a0=0x0 -F key=time-change
If the auditd daemon is configured to use the auditctl
utility to read audit rules during daemon startup, add the following line to
/etc/audit/audit.rules file:
-a always,exit -F arch=b32 -S clock_settime -F a0=0x0 -F key=time-change
If the system is 64 bit then also add the following line:
-a always,exit -F arch=b64 -S clock_settime -F a0=0x0 -F key=time-change
The -k option allows for the specification of a key in string form that can
be used for better reporting capability through ausearch and aureport.
Multiple system calls can be defined on the same line to save space if
desired, but is not required. See an example of multiple combined syscalls:
-a always,exit -F arch=b64 -S adjtimex,settimeofday -F key=audit_time_rules | Rationale: | Arbitrary changes to the system time can be used to obfuscate
nefarious activities in log files, as well as to confuse network services that
are highly dependent upon an accurate system time (such as sshd). All changes
to the system time should be audited. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_audit_rules_time_clock_settime | Identifiers and References | References:
1, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 19, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 5.4.1.1, APO10.01, APO10.03, APO10.04, APO10.05, APO11.04, APO12.06, APO13.01, BAI03.05, BAI08.02, DSS01.03, DSS01.04, DSS02.02, DSS02.04, DSS02.07, DSS03.01, DSS03.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.03, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, MEA01.01, MEA01.02, MEA01.03, MEA01.04, MEA01.05, MEA02.01, 3.1.7, CCI-001487, CCI-000169, 164.308(a)(1)(ii)(D), 164.308(a)(3)(ii)(A), 164.308(a)(5)(ii)(C), 164.312(a)(2)(i), 164.312(b), 164.312(d), 164.312(e), 4.2.3.10, 4.3.2.6.7, 4.3.3.3.9, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.4.4.7, 4.3.4.5.6, 4.3.4.5.7, 4.3.4.5.8, 4.4.2.1, 4.4.2.2, 4.4.2.4, SR 1.13, SR 2.10, SR 2.11, SR 2.12, SR 2.6, SR 2.8, SR 2.9, SR 3.1, SR 3.5, SR 3.8, SR 4.1, SR 4.3, SR 5.1, SR 5.2, SR 5.3, SR 6.1, SR 6.2, SR 7.1, SR 7.6, A.11.2.6, A.12.4.1, A.12.4.2, A.12.4.3, A.12.4.4, A.12.7.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.2.1, A.14.1.3, A.14.2.7, A.15.2.1, A.15.2.2, A.16.1.4, A.16.1.5, A.16.1.7, A.6.2.1, A.6.2.2, AU-2(d), AU-12(c), AC-6(9), CM-6(a), DE.AE-3, DE.AE-5, DE.CM-1, DE.CM-3, DE.CM-7, ID.SC-4, PR.AC-3, PR.PT-1, PR.PT-4, RS.AN-1, RS.AN-4, Req-10.4.2.b | |
|
Group
Record Attempts to Alter Logon and Logout Events
Group contains 2 rules |
[ref]
The audit system already collects login information for all users
and root. If the auditd daemon is configured to use the
augenrules program to read audit rules during daemon startup (the
default), add the following lines to a file with suffix .rules in the
directory /etc/audit/rules.d in order to watch for attempted manual
edits of files involved in storing logon events:
-w /var/log/tallylog -p wa -k logins
-w /var/run/faillock/ -p wa -k logins
-w /var/log/lastlog -p wa -k logins
If the auditd daemon is configured to use the auditctl
utility to read audit rules during daemon startup, add the following lines to
/etc/audit/audit.rules file in order to watch for unattempted manual
edits of files involved in storing logon events:
-w /var/log/tallylog -p wa -k logins
-w /var/run/faillock/ -p wa -k logins
-w /var/log/lastlog -p wa -k logins |
Rule
Record Attempts to Alter Logon and Logout Events - lastlog
[ref] | The audit system already collects login information for all users
and root. If the auditd daemon is configured to use the
augenrules program to read audit rules during daemon startup (the
default), add the following lines to a file with suffix .rules in the
directory /etc/audit/rules.d in order to watch for attempted manual
edits of files involved in storing logon events:
-w /var/log/lastlog -p wa -k logins
If the auditd daemon is configured to use the auditctl
utility to read audit rules during daemon startup, add the following lines to
/etc/audit/audit.rules file in order to watch for unattempted manual
edits of files involved in storing logon events:
-w /var/log/lastlog -p wa -k logins | Rationale: | Manual editing of these files may indicate nefarious activity, such
as an attacker attempting to remove evidence of an intrusion. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_audit_rules_login_events_lastlog | Identifiers and References | References:
1, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 19, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, APO10.01, APO10.03, APO10.04, APO10.05, APO11.04, APO12.06, APO13.01, BAI03.05, BAI08.02, DSS01.03, DSS01.04, DSS02.02, DSS02.04, DSS02.07, DSS03.01, DSS03.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.03, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, MEA01.01, MEA01.02, MEA01.03, MEA01.04, MEA01.05, MEA02.01, 3.1.7, CCI-000126, CCI-000172, CCI-002884, 164.308(a)(1)(ii)(D), 164.308(a)(3)(ii)(A), 164.308(a)(5)(ii)(C), 164.312(a)(2)(i), 164.312(b), 164.312(d), 164.312(e), 4.2.3.10, 4.3.2.6.7, 4.3.3.3.9, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.4.4.7, 4.3.4.5.6, 4.3.4.5.7, 4.3.4.5.8, 4.4.2.1, 4.4.2.2, 4.4.2.4, SR 1.13, SR 2.10, SR 2.11, SR 2.12, SR 2.6, SR 2.8, SR 2.9, SR 3.1, SR 3.5, SR 3.8, SR 4.1, SR 4.3, SR 5.1, SR 5.2, SR 5.3, SR 6.1, SR 6.2, SR 7.1, SR 7.6, A.11.2.6, A.12.4.1, A.12.4.2, A.12.4.3, A.12.4.4, A.12.7.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.2.1, A.14.1.3, A.14.2.7, A.15.2.1, A.15.2.2, A.16.1.4, A.16.1.5, A.16.1.7, A.6.2.1, A.6.2.2, AU-2(d), AU-12(c), AC-6(9), CM-6(a), DE.AE-3, DE.AE-5, DE.CM-1, DE.CM-3, DE.CM-7, ID.SC-4, PR.AC-3, PR.PT-1, PR.PT-4, RS.AN-1, RS.AN-4, FAU_GEN.1.1.c, Req-10.2.3, SRG-OS-000392-GPOS-00172, SRG-OS-000470-GPOS-00214, SRG-OS-000473-GPOS-00218, SRG-OS-000473-VMM-001930, SRG-OS-000470-VMM-001900 | |
|
Rule
Record Attempts to Alter Logon and Logout Events - faillock
[ref] | The audit system already collects login information for all users
and root. If the auditd daemon is configured to use the
augenrules program to read audit rules during daemon startup (the
default), add the following lines to a file with suffix .rules in the
directory /etc/audit/rules.d in order to watch for attempted manual
edits of files involved in storing logon events:
-w /var/run/faillock -p wa -k logins
If the auditd daemon is configured to use the auditctl
utility to read audit rules during daemon startup, add the following lines to
/etc/audit/audit.rules file in order to watch for unattempted manual
edits of files involved in storing logon events:
-w /var/run/faillock -p wa -k logins | Rationale: | Manual editing of these files may indicate nefarious activity, such
as an attacker attempting to remove evidence of an intrusion. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_audit_rules_login_events_faillock | Identifiers and References | References:
1, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 19, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, APO10.01, APO10.03, APO10.04, APO10.05, APO11.04, APO12.06, APO13.01, BAI03.05, BAI08.02, DSS01.03, DSS01.04, DSS02.02, DSS02.04, DSS02.07, DSS03.01, DSS03.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.03, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, MEA01.01, MEA01.02, MEA01.03, MEA01.04, MEA01.05, MEA02.01, 3.1.7, CCI-000126, CCI-000172, CCI-002884, 164.308(a)(1)(ii)(D), 164.308(a)(3)(ii)(A), 164.308(a)(5)(ii)(C), 164.312(a)(2)(i), 164.312(b), 164.312(d), 164.312(e), 4.2.3.10, 4.3.2.6.7, 4.3.3.3.9, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.4.4.7, 4.3.4.5.6, 4.3.4.5.7, 4.3.4.5.8, 4.4.2.1, 4.4.2.2, 4.4.2.4, SR 1.13, SR 2.10, SR 2.11, SR 2.12, SR 2.6, SR 2.8, SR 2.9, SR 3.1, SR 3.5, SR 3.8, SR 4.1, SR 4.3, SR 5.1, SR 5.2, SR 5.3, SR 6.1, SR 6.2, SR 7.1, SR 7.6, A.11.2.6, A.12.4.1, A.12.4.2, A.12.4.3, A.12.4.4, A.12.7.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.2.1, A.14.1.3, A.14.2.7, A.15.2.1, A.15.2.2, A.16.1.4, A.16.1.5, A.16.1.7, A.6.2.1, A.6.2.2, AU-2(d), AU-12(c), AC-6(9), CM-6(a), DE.AE-3, DE.AE-5, DE.CM-1, DE.CM-3, DE.CM-7, ID.SC-4, PR.AC-3, PR.PT-1, PR.PT-4, RS.AN-1, RS.AN-4, FAU_GEN.1.1.c, Req-10.2.3, SRG-OS-000392-GPOS-00172, SRG-OS-000470-GPOS-00214, SRG-OS-000473-GPOS-00218, SRG-OS-000473-VMM-001930, SRG-OS-000470-VMM-001900 | |
|
Rule
Ensure auditd Collects System Administrator Actions
[ref] | At a minimum, the audit system should collect administrator actions
for all users and root. If the auditd daemon is configured to use the
augenrules program to read audit rules during daemon startup (the default),
add the following line to a file with suffix .rules in the directory
/etc/audit/rules.d :
-w /etc/sudoers -p wa -k actions
-w /etc/sudoers.d/ -p wa -k actions
If the auditd daemon is configured to use the auditctl
utility to read audit rules during daemon startup, add the following line to
/etc/audit/audit.rules file:
-w /etc/sudoers -p wa -k actions
-w /etc/sudoers.d/ -p wa -k actions | Rationale: | The actions taken by system administrators should be audited to keep a record
of what was executed on the system, as well as, for accountability purposes. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_audit_rules_sysadmin_actions | Identifiers and References | References:
1, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 19, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 5.4.1.1, APO10.01, APO10.03, APO10.04, APO10.05, APO11.04, APO12.06, APO13.01, BAI03.05, BAI08.02, DSS01.03, DSS01.04, DSS02.02, DSS02.04, DSS02.07, DSS03.01, DSS03.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.03, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS06.03, MEA01.01, MEA01.02, MEA01.03, MEA01.04, MEA01.05, MEA02.01, 3.1.7, CCI-000126, CCI-000130, CCI-000135, CCI-000172, CCI-002884, 164.308(a)(1)(ii)(D), 164.308(a)(3)(ii)(A), 164.308(a)(5)(ii)(C), 164.312(a)(2)(i), 164.312(b), 164.312(d), 164.312(e), 4.2.3.10, 4.3.2.6.7, 4.3.3.2.2, 4.3.3.3.9, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.4.7, 4.3.4.5.6, 4.3.4.5.7, 4.3.4.5.8, 4.4.2.1, 4.4.2.2, 4.4.2.4, SR 1.1, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.10, SR 2.11, SR 2.12, SR 2.6, SR 2.8, SR 2.9, SR 3.1, SR 3.5, SR 3.8, SR 4.1, SR 4.3, SR 5.1, SR 5.2, SR 5.3, SR 6.1, SR 6.2, SR 7.1, SR 7.6, A.11.2.6, A.12.4.1, A.12.4.2, A.12.4.3, A.12.4.4, A.12.7.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.2.1, A.14.1.3, A.14.2.7, A.15.2.1, A.15.2.2, A.16.1.4, A.16.1.5, A.16.1.7, A.6.1.2, A.6.2.1, A.6.2.2, A.7.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.1, A.9.2.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.2.4, A.9.2.6, A.9.3.1, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.2, A.9.4.3, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, AC-2(7)(b), AU-2(d), AU-12(c), AC-6(9), CM-6(a), DE.AE-3, DE.AE-5, DE.CM-1, DE.CM-3, DE.CM-7, ID.SC-4, PR.AC-1, PR.AC-3, PR.AC-4, PR.AC-6, PR.PT-1, PR.PT-4, RS.AN-1, RS.AN-4, FAU_GEN.1.1.c, Req-10.2.2, Req-10.2.5.b, SRG-OS-000037-GPOS-00015, SRG-OS-000042-GPOS-00020, SRG-OS-000392-GPOS-00172, SRG-OS-000462-GPOS-00206, SRG-OS-000471-GPOS-00215, SRG-OS-000462-VMM-001840, SRG-OS-000471-VMM-001910 | |
|
Rule
Record Attempts to Alter Process and Session Initiation Information
[ref] | The audit system already collects process information for all
users and root. If the auditd daemon is configured to use the
augenrules program to read audit rules during daemon startup (the
default), add the following lines to a file with suffix .rules in the
directory /etc/audit/rules.d in order to watch for attempted manual
edits of files involved in storing such process information:
-w /var/run/utmp -p wa -k session
-w /var/log/btmp -p wa -k session
-w /var/log/wtmp -p wa -k session
If the auditd daemon is configured to use the auditctl
utility to read audit rules during daemon startup, add the following lines to
/etc/audit/audit.rules file in order to watch for attempted manual
edits of files involved in storing such process information:
-w /var/run/utmp -p wa -k session
-w /var/log/btmp -p wa -k session
-w /var/log/wtmp -p wa -k session | Rationale: | Manual editing of these files may indicate nefarious activity, such
as an attacker attempting to remove evidence of an intrusion. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_audit_rules_session_events | Identifiers and References | References:
1, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 19, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 5.4.1.1, APO10.01, APO10.03, APO10.04, APO10.05, APO11.04, APO12.06, APO13.01, BAI03.05, BAI08.02, DSS01.03, DSS01.04, DSS02.02, DSS02.04, DSS02.07, DSS03.01, DSS03.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.03, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, MEA01.01, MEA01.02, MEA01.03, MEA01.04, MEA01.05, MEA02.01, 3.1.7, 164.308(a)(1)(ii)(D), 164.308(a)(3)(ii)(A), 164.308(a)(5)(ii)(C), 164.312(a)(2)(i), 164.312(b), 164.312(d), 164.312(e), 4.2.3.10, 4.3.2.6.7, 4.3.3.3.9, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.4.4.7, 4.3.4.5.6, 4.3.4.5.7, 4.3.4.5.8, 4.4.2.1, 4.4.2.2, 4.4.2.4, SR 1.13, SR 2.10, SR 2.11, SR 2.12, SR 2.6, SR 2.8, SR 2.9, SR 3.1, SR 3.5, SR 3.8, SR 4.1, SR 4.3, SR 5.1, SR 5.2, SR 5.3, SR 6.1, SR 6.2, SR 7.1, SR 7.6, A.11.2.6, A.12.4.1, A.12.4.2, A.12.4.3, A.12.4.4, A.12.7.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.2.1, A.14.1.3, A.14.2.7, A.15.2.1, A.15.2.2, A.16.1.4, A.16.1.5, A.16.1.7, A.6.2.1, A.6.2.2, AU-2(d), AU-12(c), CM-6(a), DE.AE-3, DE.AE-5, DE.CM-1, DE.CM-3, DE.CM-7, ID.SC-4, PR.AC-3, PR.PT-1, PR.PT-4, RS.AN-1, RS.AN-4, FAU_GEN.1.1.c, Req-10.2.3 | |
|
Rule
Record Events that Modify the System's Network Environment
[ref] | If the auditd daemon is configured to use the
augenrules program to read audit rules during daemon startup (the
default), add the following lines to a file with suffix .rules in the
directory /etc/audit/rules.d , setting ARCH to either b32 or b64 as
appropriate for your system:
-a always,exit -F arch=ARCH -S sethostname,setdomainname -F key=audit_rules_networkconfig_modification
-w /etc/issue -p wa -k audit_rules_networkconfig_modification
-w /etc/issue.net -p wa -k audit_rules_networkconfig_modification
-w /etc/hosts -p wa -k audit_rules_networkconfig_modification
-w /etc/sysconfig/network -p wa -k audit_rules_networkconfig_modification
If the auditd daemon is configured to use the auditctl
utility to read audit rules during daemon startup, add the following lines to
/etc/audit/audit.rules file, setting ARCH to either b32 or b64 as
appropriate for your system:
-a always,exit -F arch=ARCH -S sethostname,setdomainname -F key=audit_rules_networkconfig_modification
-w /etc/issue -p wa -k audit_rules_networkconfig_modification
-w /etc/issue.net -p wa -k audit_rules_networkconfig_modification
-w /etc/hosts -p wa -k audit_rules_networkconfig_modification
-w /etc/sysconfig/network -p wa -k audit_rules_networkconfig_modification | Rationale: | The network environment should not be modified by anything other
than administrator action. Any change to network parameters should be
audited. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_audit_rules_networkconfig_modification | Identifiers and References | References:
1, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 19, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 5.4.1.1, APO10.01, APO10.03, APO10.04, APO10.05, APO11.04, APO12.06, APO13.01, BAI03.05, BAI08.02, DSS01.03, DSS01.04, DSS02.02, DSS02.04, DSS02.07, DSS03.01, DSS03.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.03, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, MEA01.01, MEA01.02, MEA01.03, MEA01.04, MEA01.05, MEA02.01, 3.1.7, 164.308(a)(1)(ii)(D), 164.308(a)(3)(ii)(A), 164.308(a)(5)(ii)(C), 164.312(a)(2)(i), 164.312(b), 164.312(d), 164.312(e), 4.2.3.10, 4.3.2.6.7, 4.3.3.3.9, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.4.4.7, 4.3.4.5.6, 4.3.4.5.7, 4.3.4.5.8, 4.4.2.1, 4.4.2.2, 4.4.2.4, SR 1.13, SR 2.10, SR 2.11, SR 2.12, SR 2.6, SR 2.8, SR 2.9, SR 3.1, SR 3.5, SR 3.8, SR 4.1, SR 4.3, SR 5.1, SR 5.2, SR 5.3, SR 6.1, SR 6.2, SR 7.1, SR 7.6, A.11.2.6, A.12.4.1, A.12.4.2, A.12.4.3, A.12.4.4, A.12.7.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.2.1, A.14.1.3, A.14.2.7, A.15.2.1, A.15.2.2, A.16.1.4, A.16.1.5, A.16.1.7, A.6.2.1, A.6.2.2, AU-2(d), AU-12(c), AC-6(9), CM-6(a), DE.AE-3, DE.AE-5, DE.CM-1, DE.CM-3, DE.CM-7, ID.SC-4, PR.AC-3, PR.PT-1, PR.PT-4, RS.AN-1, RS.AN-4, Req-10.5.5 | |
|
Rule
Record Events that Modify the System's Mandatory Access Controls
[ref] | If the auditd daemon is configured to use the
augenrules program to read audit rules during daemon startup (the
default), add the following line to a file with suffix .rules in the
directory /etc/audit/rules.d :
-w /etc/selinux/ -p wa -k MAC-policy
If the auditd daemon is configured to use the auditctl
utility to read audit rules during daemon startup, add the following line to
/etc/audit/audit.rules file:
-w /etc/selinux/ -p wa -k MAC-policy | Rationale: | The system's mandatory access policy (SELinux) should not be
arbitrarily changed by anything other than administrator action. All changes to
MAC policy should be audited. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_audit_rules_mac_modification | Identifiers and References | References:
1, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 19, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 5.4.1.1, APO10.01, APO10.03, APO10.04, APO10.05, APO11.04, APO12.06, APO13.01, BAI03.05, BAI08.02, DSS01.03, DSS01.04, DSS02.02, DSS02.04, DSS02.07, DSS03.01, DSS03.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.03, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, MEA01.01, MEA01.02, MEA01.03, MEA01.04, MEA01.05, MEA02.01, 3.1.8, 164.308(a)(1)(ii)(D), 164.308(a)(3)(ii)(A), 164.308(a)(5)(ii)(C), 164.312(a)(2)(i), 164.312(b), 164.312(d), 164.312(e), 4.2.3.10, 4.3.2.6.7, 4.3.3.3.9, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.4.4.7, 4.3.4.5.6, 4.3.4.5.7, 4.3.4.5.8, 4.4.2.1, 4.4.2.2, 4.4.2.4, SR 1.13, SR 2.10, SR 2.11, SR 2.12, SR 2.6, SR 2.8, SR 2.9, SR 3.1, SR 3.5, SR 3.8, SR 4.1, SR 4.3, SR 5.1, SR 5.2, SR 5.3, SR 6.1, SR 6.2, SR 7.1, SR 7.6, A.11.2.6, A.12.4.1, A.12.4.2, A.12.4.3, A.12.4.4, A.12.7.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.2.1, A.14.1.3, A.14.2.7, A.15.2.1, A.15.2.2, A.16.1.4, A.16.1.5, A.16.1.7, A.6.2.1, A.6.2.2, AU-2(d), AU-12(c), CM-6(a), DE.AE-3, DE.AE-5, DE.CM-1, DE.CM-3, DE.CM-7, ID.SC-4, PR.AC-3, PR.PT-1, PR.PT-4, RS.AN-1, RS.AN-4, FAU_GEN.1.1.c, Req-10.5.5 | |
|
Rule
Ensure the audit Subsystem is Installed
[ref] | The audit package should be installed. | Rationale: | The auditd service is an access monitoring and accounting daemon, watching system calls to audit any access, in comparison with potential local access control policy such as SELinux policy. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_package_audit_installed | Identifiers and References | References:
NT28(R50), AC-7(a), AU-7(1), AU-7(2), AU-14, AU-12(2), AU-2(a), CM-6(a), SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, SRG-OS-000122-GPOS-00063 | |
|
Rule
Enable auditd Service
[ref] | The auditd service is an essential userspace component of
the Linux Auditing System, as it is responsible for writing audit records to
disk.
The auditd service can be enabled with the following command:
$ sudo systemctl enable auditd.service | Rationale: | Without establishing what type of events occurred, it would be difficult
to establish, correlate, and investigate the events leading up to an outage or attack.
Ensuring the auditd service is active ensures audit records
generated by the kernel are appropriately recorded.
Additionally, a properly configured audit subsystem ensures that actions of
individual system users can be uniquely traced to those users so they
can be held accountable for their actions. | Severity: | high | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_service_auditd_enabled | Identifiers and References | References:
1, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 19, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 5.4.1.1, APO10.01, APO10.03, APO10.04, APO10.05, APO11.04, APO12.06, APO13.01, BAI03.05, BAI08.02, DSS01.03, DSS01.04, DSS02.02, DSS02.04, DSS02.07, DSS03.01, DSS03.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.03, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, MEA01.01, MEA01.02, MEA01.03, MEA01.04, MEA01.05, MEA02.01, 3.3.1, 3.3.2, 3.3.6, CCI-000126, CCI-000130, CCI-000131, CCI-000132, CCI-000133, CCI-000134, CCI-000135, CCI-001464, CCI-001487, CCI-001814, 164.308(a)(1)(ii)(D), 164.308(a)(5)(ii)(C), 164.310(a)(2)(iv), 164.310(d)(2)(iii), 164.312(b), 4.2.3.10, 4.3.2.6.7, 4.3.3.3.9, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.4.4.7, 4.3.4.5.6, 4.3.4.5.7, 4.3.4.5.8, 4.4.2.1, 4.4.2.2, 4.4.2.4, SR 1.13, SR 2.10, SR 2.11, SR 2.12, SR 2.6, SR 2.8, SR 2.9, SR 3.1, SR 3.5, SR 3.8, SR 4.1, SR 4.3, SR 5.1, SR 5.2, SR 5.3, SR 6.1, SR 6.2, SR 7.1, SR 7.6, A.11.2.6, A.12.4.1, A.12.4.2, A.12.4.3, A.12.4.4, A.12.7.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.2.1, A.14.1.3, A.14.2.7, A.15.2.1, A.15.2.2, A.16.1.4, A.16.1.5, A.16.1.7, A.6.2.1, A.6.2.2, AC-2(g), AU-3, AU-10, AU-2(d), AU-12(c), AU-14(1), AC-6(9), CM-6(a), DE.AE-3, DE.AE-5, DE.CM-1, DE.CM-3, DE.CM-7, ID.SC-4, PR.AC-3, PR.PT-1, PR.PT-4, RS.AN-1, RS.AN-4, Req-10.1, SRG-OS-000037-GPOS-00015, SRG-OS-000038-GPOS-00016, SRG-OS-000039-GPOS-00017, SRG-OS-000040-GPOS-00018, SRG-OS-000042-GPOS-00021, SRG-OS-000254-GPOS-00095, SRG-OS-000255-GPOS-00096, SRG-OS-000365-GPOS-00152, SRG-OS-000037-VMM-000150, SRG-OS-000063-VMM-000310, SRG-OS-000038-VMM-000160, SRG-OS-000039-VMM-000170, SRG-OS-000040-VMM-000180, SRG-OS-000041-VMM-000190 | |
|
Rule
Enable Auditing for Processes Which Start Prior to the Audit Daemon
[ref] | To ensure all processes can be audited, even those which start
prior to the audit daemon, add the argument audit=1 to the default
GRUB 2 command line for the Linux operating system in
/boot/grub2/grubenv , in the manner below:
# grub2-editenv - set "$(grub2-editenv - list | grep kernelopts) audit=1" Warning:
The GRUB 2 configuration file, grub.cfg ,
is automatically updated each time a new kernel is installed. Note that any
changes to /etc/default/grub require rebuilding the grub.cfg
file. To update the GRUB 2 configuration file manually, use the
grub2-mkconfig -o command as follows:
| Rationale: | Each process on the system carries an "auditable" flag which indicates whether
its activities can be audited. Although auditd takes care of enabling
this for all processes which launch after it does, adding the kernel argument
ensures it is set for every process during boot. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_grub2_audit_argument | Identifiers and References | References:
1, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 19, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 5.4.1.1, APO10.01, APO10.03, APO10.04, APO10.05, APO11.04, APO12.06, APO13.01, BAI03.05, BAI08.02, DSS01.04, DSS02.02, DSS02.04, DSS02.07, DSS03.01, DSS05.02, DSS05.03, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, MEA01.01, MEA01.02, MEA01.03, MEA01.04, MEA01.05, MEA02.01, 3.3.1, CCI-001464, CCI-000130, 164.308(a)(1)(ii)(D), 164.308(a)(5)(ii)(C), 164.310(a)(2)(iv), 164.310(d)(2)(iii), 164.312(b), 4.2.3.10, 4.3.2.6.7, 4.3.3.3.9, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.4.4.7, 4.3.4.5.6, 4.3.4.5.7, 4.3.4.5.8, 4.4.2.1, 4.4.2.2, 4.4.2.4, SR 1.13, SR 2.10, SR 2.11, SR 2.12, SR 2.6, SR 2.8, SR 2.9, SR 3.1, SR 3.5, SR 3.8, SR 4.1, SR 4.3, SR 5.1, SR 5.2, SR 5.3, SR 6.1, SR 7.1, SR 7.6, A.11.2.6, A.12.4.1, A.12.4.2, A.12.4.3, A.12.4.4, A.12.7.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.2.1, A.14.1.3, A.15.2.1, A.15.2.2, A.16.1.4, A.16.1.5, A.16.1.7, A.6.2.1, A.6.2.2, AC-17(1), AU-14(1), AU-10, CM-6(a), IR-5(1), DE.AE-3, DE.AE-5, ID.SC-4, PR.AC-3, PR.PT-1, PR.PT-4, RS.AN-1, RS.AN-4, Req-10.3, SRG-OS-000254-GPOS-00095, SRG-OS-000254-VMM-000880 | |
|
Rule
Extend Audit Backlog Limit for the Audit Daemon
[ref] | To improve the kernel capacity to queue all log events, even those which occurred
prior to the audit daemon, add the argument audit_backlog_limit=8192 to the default
GRUB 2 command line for the Linux operating system in
/etc/default/grub , in the manner below:
GRUB_CMDLINE_LINUX="crashkernel=auto rd.lvm.lv=VolGroup/LogVol06 rd.lvm.lv=VolGroup/lv_swap rhgb quiet rd.shell=0 audit=1 audit_backlog_limit=8192" Warning:
The GRUB 2 configuration file, grub.cfg ,
is automatically updated each time a new kernel is installed. Note that any
changes to /etc/default/grub require rebuilding the grub.cfg
file. To update the GRUB 2 configuration file manually, use the
grub2-mkconfig -o command as follows:
| Rationale: | audit_backlog_limit sets the queue length for audit events awaiting transfer
to the audit daemon. Until the audit daemon is up and running, all log messages
are stored in this queue. If the queue is overrun during boot process, the action
defined by audit failure flag is taken. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_grub2_audit_backlog_limit_argument | Identifiers and References | References:
CM-6(a), SRG-OS-000254-GPOS-00095 | |
|
Group
Installing and Maintaining Software
Group contains 7 groups and 14 rules |
[ref]
The following sections contain information on
security-relevant choices during the initial operating system
installation process and the setup of software
updates. |
Group
Updating Software
Group contains 2 rules |
[ref]
The zypper command line tool is used to install and
update software packages. The system also provides a graphical
software update tool in the System menu, in the Administration submenu,
called Software Update.
SUSE Linux Enterprise 15 systems contain an installed software catalog called
the RPM database, which records metadata of installed packages. Consistently using
zypper or the graphical Software Update for all software installation
allows for insight into the current inventory of installed software on the system.
|
Rule
Ensure Software Patches Installed
[ref] |
If the system is configured for online updates, invoking the following command will list available
security updates:
$ sudo zypper refresh && sudo zypper list-patches -g security
NOTE: U.S. Defense systems are required to be patched within 30 days or sooner as local policy
dictates. | Rationale: | Installing software updates is a fundamental mitigation against
the exploitation of publicly-known vulnerabilities. If the most
recent security patches and updates are not installed, unauthorized
users may take advantage of weaknesses in the unpatched software. The
lack of prompt attention to patching could result in a system compromise. | Severity: | high | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_security_patches_up_to_date | Identifiers and References | References:
NT28(R08), 18, 20, 4, 5.10.4.1, APO12.01, APO12.02, APO12.03, APO12.04, BAI03.10, DSS05.01, DSS05.02, CCI-000366, 4.2.3, 4.2.3.12, 4.2.3.7, 4.2.3.9, A.12.6.1, A.14.2.3, A.16.1.3, A.18.2.2, A.18.2.3, SI-2(5), SI-2(c), CM-6(a), ID.RA-1, PR.IP-12, FMT_MOF_EXT.1, Req-6.2, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, SRG-OS-000480-VMM-002000 | |
|
Rule
Ensure gpgcheck Enabled In Main zypper Configuration
[ref] | The gpgcheck option controls whether
RPM packages' signatures are always checked prior to installation.
To configure zypper to check package signatures before installing
them, ensure the following line appears in /etc/zypp/zypper.conf in
the [main] section:
gpgcheck=1 | Rationale: | Changes to any software components can have significant effects on the
overall security of the operating system. This requirement ensures the
software has not been tampered with and that it has been provided by a
trusted vendor.
Accordingly, patches, service packs, device drivers, or operating system
components must be signed with a certificate recognized and approved by the
organization.
Verifying the authenticity of the software prior to installation
validates the integrity of the patch or upgrade received from a vendor.
This ensures the software has not been tampered with and that it has been
provided by a trusted vendor. Self-signed certificates are disallowed by
this requirement. Certificates used to verify the software must be from an
approved Certificate Authority (CA). | Severity: | high | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_ensure_gpgcheck_globally_activated | Identifiers and References | References:
NT28(R15), 11, 2, 3, 9, 5.10.4.1, APO01.06, BAI03.05, BAI06.01, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS06.02, 3.4.8, CCI-001749, 164.308(a)(1)(ii)(D), 164.312(b), 164.312(c)(1), 164.312(c)(2), 164.312(e)(2)(i), 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, 4.3.4.4.4, SR 3.1, SR 3.3, SR 3.4, SR 3.8, SR 7.6, A.11.2.4, A.12.1.2, A.12.2.1, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, CM-5(3), SI-7, SC-12, SC-12(3), CM-6(a), SA-12, SA-12(10), CM-11(a), CM-11(b), PR.DS-6, PR.DS-8, PR.IP-1, FAU_GEN.1.1.c, Req-6.2, SRG-OS-000366-GPOS-00153, SRG-OS-000366-VMM-001430, SRG-OS-000370-VMM-001460, SRG-OS-000404-VMM-001650 | |
|
Group
Sudo
Group contains 1 rule |
[ref]
Sudo , which stands for "su 'do'", provides the ability to delegate authority
to certain users, groups of users, or system administrators. When configured for system
users and/or groups, Sudo can allow a user or group to execute privileged commands
that normally only root is allowed to execute.
For more information on Sudo and addition Sudo configuration options, see
https://www.sudo.ws. |
Rule
Install sudo Package
[ref] | The sudo package can be installed with the following command:
$ sudo zypper install sudo | Rationale: | sudo is a program designed to allow a system administrator to give
limited root privileges to users and log root activity. The basic philosophy
is to give as few privileges as possible but still allow system users to
get their work done.
| Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_package_sudo_installed | Identifiers and References | References:
CM-6(a), SRG-OS-000324-GPOS-00125 | |
|
Group
System and Software Integrity
Group contains 3 groups and 5 rules |
[ref]
System and software integrity can be gained by installing antivirus, increasing
system encryption strength with FIPS, verifying installed software, enabling SELinux,
installing an Intrusion Prevention System, etc. However, installing or enabling integrity
checking tools cannot prevent intrusions, but they can detect that an intrusion
may have occurred. Requirements for integrity checking may be highly dependent on
the environment in which the system will be used. Snapshot-based approaches such
as AIDE may induce considerable overhead in the presence of frequent software updates. |
Group
Software Integrity Checking
Group contains 2 groups and 4 rules |
[ref]
Both the AIDE (Advanced Intrusion Detection Environment)
software and the RPM package management system provide
mechanisms for verifying the integrity of installed software.
AIDE uses snapshots of file metadata (such as hashes) and compares these
to current system files in order to detect changes.
The RPM package management system can conduct integrity
checks by comparing information in its metadata database with
files installed on the system. |
Group
Verify Integrity with AIDE
Group contains 2 rules |
[ref]
AIDE conducts integrity checks by comparing information about
files with previously-gathered information. Ideally, the AIDE database is
created immediately after initial system configuration, and then again after any
software update. AIDE is highly configurable, with further configuration
information located in /usr/share/doc/aide-VERSION . |
Rule
Install AIDE
[ref] | The aide package can be installed with the following command:
$ sudo zypper install aide | Rationale: | The AIDE package must be installed if it is to be available for integrity checking. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_package_aide_installed | Identifiers and References | References:
NT28(R51), 1.4.1, 1, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 2, 3, 5, 7, 8, 9, 5.10.1.3, APO01.06, BAI01.06, BAI02.01, BAI03.05, BAI06.01, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS01.03, DSS03.05, DSS04.07, DSS05.02, DSS05.03, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, DSS06.06, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, 4.3.4.4.4, SR 3.1, SR 3.3, SR 3.4, SR 3.8, SR 4.1, SR 6.2, SR 7.6, A.11.2.4, A.12.1.2, A.12.2.1, A.12.4.1, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.14.2.7, A.15.2.1, A.8.2.3, CM-6(a), DE.CM-1, DE.CM-7, PR.DS-1, PR.DS-6, PR.DS-8, PR.IP-1, PR.IP-3, Req-11.5, SRG-OS-000363-GPOS-00150 | |
|
Rule
Configure Periodic Execution of AIDE
[ref] | At a minimum, AIDE should be configured to run a weekly scan.
To implement a daily execution of AIDE at 4:05am using cron, add the following line to /etc/crontab :
05 4 * * * root /usr/sbin/aide --check
To implement a weekly execution of AIDE at 4:05am using cron, add the following line to /etc/crontab :
05 4 * * 0 root /usr/sbin/aide --check
AIDE can be executed periodically through other means; this is merely one example.
The usage of cron's special time codes, such as @daily and
@weekly is acceptable. | Rationale: | By default, AIDE does not install itself for periodic execution. Periodically
running AIDE is necessary to reveal unexpected changes in installed files.
Unauthorized changes to the baseline configuration could make the system vulnerable
to various attacks or allow unauthorized access to the operating system. Changes to
operating system configurations can have unintended side effects, some of which may
be relevant to security.
Detecting such changes and providing an automated response can help avoid unintended,
negative consequences that could ultimately affect the security state of the operating
system. The operating system's Information Management Officer (IMO)/Information System
Security Officer (ISSO) and System Administrators (SAs) must be notified via email and/or
monitoring system trap when there is an unauthorized modification of a configuration item. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_aide_periodic_cron_checking | Identifiers and References | References:
NT28(R51), 1, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 2, 3, 5, 7, 8, 9, 5.10.1.3, APO01.06, BAI01.06, BAI02.01, BAI03.05, BAI06.01, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS01.03, DSS03.05, DSS04.07, DSS05.02, DSS05.03, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, DSS06.06, CCI-001744, CCI-002699, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, 4.3.4.4.4, SR 3.1, SR 3.3, SR 3.4, SR 3.8, SR 4.1, SR 6.2, SR 7.6, A.11.2.4, A.12.1.2, A.12.2.1, A.12.4.1, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.14.2.7, A.15.2.1, A.8.2.3, SI-7, SI-7(1), CM-6(a), DE.CM-1, DE.CM-7, PR.DS-1, PR.DS-6, PR.DS-8, PR.IP-1, PR.IP-3, Req-11.5, SRG-OS-000363-GPOS-00150, SRG-OS-000446-GPOS-00200 | |
|
Group
Verify Integrity with RPM
Group contains 2 rules |
[ref]
The RPM package management system includes the ability
to verify the integrity of installed packages by comparing the
installed files with information about the files taken from the
package metadata stored in the RPM database. Although an attacker
could corrupt the RPM database (analogous to attacking the AIDE
database as described above), this check can still reveal
modification of important files. To list which files on the system differ from what is expected by the RPM database:
$ rpm -qVa
See the man page for rpm to see a complete explanation of each column. |
Rule
Verify and Correct File Permissions with RPM
[ref] | The RPM package management system can check file access permissions
of installed software packages, including many that are important
to system security.
Verify that the file permissions of system files
and commands match vendor values. Check the file permissions
with the following command:
$ sudo rpm -Va | awk '{ if (substr($0,2,1)=="M") print $NF }'
Output indicates files that do not match vendor defaults.
After locating a file with incorrect permissions,
run the following command to determine which package owns it:
$ rpm -qf FILENAME
Next, run the following command to reset its permissions to
the correct values:
$ sudo rpm --setperms PACKAGENAME Warning:
Profiles may require that specific files have stricter file permissions than defined by the
vendor.
Such files will be reported as a finding and need to be evaluated according to your policy
and deployment environment. | Rationale: | Permissions on system binaries and configuration files that are too generous
could allow an unauthorized user to gain privileges that they should not have.
The permissions set by the vendor should be maintained. Any deviations from
this baseline should be investigated. | Severity: | high | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_rpm_verify_permissions | Identifiers and References | References:
6.1.1, 1, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, 6, 9, 5.10.4.1, APO01.06, APO11.04, BAI03.05, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, MEA02.01, 3.3.8, 3.4.1, CCI-001493, CCI-001494, CCI-001495, CCI-001496, 164.308(a)(1)(ii)(D), 164.312(b), 164.312(c)(1), 164.312(c)(2), 164.312(e)(2)(i), 4.3.3.3.9, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, 4.3.4.4.7, 4.4.2.1, 4.4.2.2, 4.4.2.4, SR 2.1, SR 2.10, SR 2.11, SR 2.12, SR 2.8, SR 2.9, SR 5.2, SR 7.6, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.12.1.2, A.12.4.1, A.12.4.2, A.12.4.3, A.12.4.4, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.12.7.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(d), CM-6(c), SI-7, SI-7(1), SI-7(6), AU-9(3), CM-6(a), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, PR.IP-1, PR.PT-1, Req-11.5, SRG-OS-000256-GPOS-00097, SRG-OS-000257-GPOS-00098, SRG-OS-000258-GPOS-00099, SRG-OS-000278-GPOS-00108 | |
|
Rule
Verify and Correct Ownership with RPM
[ref] | The RPM package management system can check file ownership
permissions of installed software packages, including many that are
important to system security. After locating a file with incorrect
permissions, which can be found with
rpm -Va | awk '{ if (substr($0,6,1)=="U" || substr($0,7,1)=="G") print $NF }'
run the following command to determine which package owns it:
$ rpm -qf FILENAME
Next, run the following command to reset its permissions to
the correct values:
$ sudo rpm --setugids PACKAGENAME Warning:
Profiles may require that specific files be owned by root while the default owner defined
by the vendor is different.
Such files will be reported as a finding and need to be evaluated according to your policy
and deployment environment. | Rationale: | Ownership of binaries and configuration files that is incorrect
could allow an unauthorized user to gain privileges that they should
not have. The ownership set by the vendor should be maintained. Any
deviations from this baseline should be investigated. | Severity: | high | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_rpm_verify_ownership | Identifiers and References | References:
6.1.1, 1, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, 6, 9, 5.10.4.1, APO01.06, APO11.04, BAI03.05, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, MEA02.01, 3.3.8, 3.4.1, CCI-001494, CCI-001496, 4.3.3.3.9, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, 4.3.4.4.7, 4.4.2.1, 4.4.2.2, 4.4.2.4, SR 2.1, SR 2.10, SR 2.11, SR 2.12, SR 2.8, SR 2.9, SR 5.2, SR 7.6, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.12.1.2, A.12.4.1, A.12.4.2, A.12.4.3, A.12.4.4, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.12.7.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(d), CM-6(c), SI-7, SI-7(1), SI-7(6), AU-9(3), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, PR.IP-1, PR.PT-1, Req-11.5, SRG-OS-000257-GPOS-00098, SRG-OS-000278-GPOS-00108 | |
|
Rule
Disable Prelinking
[ref] | The prelinking feature changes binaries in an attempt to decrease their startup
time. In order to disable it, change or add the following line inside the file
/etc/sysconfig/prelink :
PRELINKING=no
Next, run the following command to return binaries to a normal, non-prelinked state:
$ sudo /usr/sbin/prelink -ua | Rationale: | Because the prelinking feature changes binaries, it can interfere with the
operation of certain software and/or modes such as AIDE, FIPS, etc. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_disable_prelink | Identifiers and References | References:
1.5.4, 11, 13, 14, 2, 3, 9, 5.10.1.3, APO01.06, BAI02.01, BAI03.05, BAI06.01, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS04.07, DSS05.03, DSS06.02, DSS06.06, 3.13.11, CCI-000803, CCI-002450, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, 4.3.4.4.4, SR 3.1, SR 3.3, SR 3.4, SR 3.8, SR 4.1, SR 7.6, A.11.2.4, A.12.1.2, A.12.2.1, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.8.2.3, SC-13, CM-6(a), PR.DS-1, PR.DS-6, PR.DS-8, PR.IP-1, Req-11.5, SRG-OS-000120-VMM-000600, SRG-OS-000478-VMM-001980, SRG-OS-000396-VMM-001590 | |
|
Group
Disk Partitioning
Group contains 6 rules |
[ref]
To ensure separation and protection of data, there
are top-level system directories which should be placed on their
own physical partition or logical volume. The installer's default
partitioning scheme creates separate logical volumes for
/ , /boot , and swap .
- If starting with any of the default layouts, check the box to
\"Review and modify partitioning.\" This allows for the easy creation
of additional logical volumes inside the volume group already
created, though it may require making
/ 's logical volume smaller to
create space. In general, using logical volumes is preferable to
using partitions because they can be more easily adjusted
later. - If creating a custom layout, create the partitions mentioned in
the previous paragraph (which the installer will require anyway),
as well as separate ones described in the following sections.
If a system has already been installed, and the default
partitioning
scheme was used, it is possible but nontrivial to
modify it to create separate logical volumes for the directories
listed above. The Logical Volume Manager (LVM) makes this possible.
See the LVM HOWTO at
http://tldp.org/HOWTO/LVM-HOWTO/
for more detailed information on LVM. |
Rule
Ensure /home Located On Separate Partition
[ref] | If user home directories will be stored locally, create a separate partition
for /home at installation time (or migrate it later using LVM). If
/home will be mounted from another system such as an NFS server, then
creating a separate partition is not necessary at installation time, and the
mountpoint can instead be configured later. | Rationale: | Ensuring that /home is mounted on its own partition enables the
setting of more restrictive mount options, and also helps ensure that
users cannot trivially fill partitions used for log or audit data storage. | Severity: | low | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_partition_for_home | Identifiers and References | References:
NT28(R12), 1.1.14, 12, 15, 8, APO13.01, DSS05.02, CCI-000366, CCI-001208, SR 3.1, SR 3.5, SR 3.8, SR 4.1, SR 4.3, SR 5.1, SR 5.2, SR 5.3, SR 7.1, SR 7.6, A.13.1.1, A.13.2.1, A.14.1.3, CM-6(a), SC-5(2), PR.PT-4, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227 | |
|
Rule
Ensure /var Located On Separate Partition
[ref] | The /var directory is used by daemons and other system
services to store frequently-changing data. Ensure that /var has its own partition
or logical volume at installation time, or migrate it using LVM. | Rationale: | Ensuring that /var is mounted on its own partition enables the
setting of more restrictive mount options. This helps protect
system services such as daemons or other programs which use it.
It is not uncommon for the /var directory to contain
world-writable directories installed by other software packages. | Severity: | low | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_partition_for_var | Identifiers and References | References:
NT28(R12), 1.1.7, 12, 15, 8, APO13.01, DSS05.02, CCI-000366, SR 3.1, SR 3.5, SR 3.8, SR 4.1, SR 4.3, SR 5.1, SR 5.2, SR 5.3, SR 7.1, SR 7.6, A.13.1.1, A.13.2.1, A.14.1.3, CM-6(a), SC-5(2), PR.PT-4, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, SRG-OS-000341-VMM-001220 | |
|
Rule
Ensure /tmp Located On Separate Partition
[ref] | The /tmp directory is a world-writable directory used
for temporary file storage. Ensure it has its own partition or
logical volume at installation time, or migrate it using LVM. | Rationale: | The /tmp partition is used as temporary storage by many programs.
Placing /tmp in its own partition enables the setting of more
restrictive mount options, which can help protect programs which use it. | Severity: | low | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_partition_for_tmp | Identifiers and References | References:
NT28(R12), 1.1.2, 12, 15, 8, APO13.01, DSS05.02, CCI-000366, SR 3.1, SR 3.5, SR 3.8, SR 4.1, SR 4.3, SR 5.1, SR 5.2, SR 5.3, SR 7.1, SR 7.6, A.13.1.1, A.13.2.1, A.14.1.3, CM-6(a), SC-5(2), PR.PT-4, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227 | |
|
Rule
Ensure /var/log/audit Located On Separate Partition
[ref] | Audit logs are stored in the /var/log/audit directory. Ensure that it
has its own partition or logical volume at installation time, or migrate it
later using LVM. Make absolutely certain that it is large enough to store all
audit logs that will be created by the auditing daemon. | Rationale: | Placing /var/log/audit in its own partition
enables better separation between audit files
and other files, and helps ensure that
auditing cannot be halted due to the partition running out
of space. | Severity: | low | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_partition_for_var_log_audit | Identifiers and References | References:
1.1.13, 1, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 2, 3, 5, 6, 8, APO11.04, APO13.01, BAI03.05, BAI04.04, DSS05.02, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, MEA02.01, CCI-000366, CCI-001849, 164.312(a)(2)(ii), 4.3.3.3.9, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.4.4.7, 4.4.2.1, 4.4.2.2, 4.4.2.4, SR 2.10, SR 2.11, SR 2.12, SR 2.8, SR 2.9, SR 3.1, SR 3.5, SR 3.8, SR 4.1, SR 4.3, SR 5.1, SR 5.2, SR 5.3, SR 7.1, SR 7.2, SR 7.6, A.12.1.3, A.12.4.1, A.12.4.2, A.12.4.3, A.12.4.4, A.12.7.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.2.1, A.14.1.3, A.17.2.1, CM-6(a), AU-4, SC-5(2), PR.DS-4, PR.PT-1, PR.PT-4, SRG-OS-000341-GPOS-00132, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, SRG-OS-000341-VMM-001220 | |
|
Rule
Ensure /var/tmp Located On Separate Partition
[ref] | The /var/tmp directory is a world-writable directory used
for temporary file storage. Ensure it has its own partition or
logical volume at installation time, or migrate it using LVM. | Rationale: | The /var/tmp partition is used as temporary storage by many programs.
Placing /var/tmp in its own partition enables the setting of more
restrictive mount options, which can help protect programs which use it. | Severity: | low | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_partition_for_var_tmp | Identifiers and References | References:
NT28(R12), 1.1.8 | |
|
Rule
Ensure /var/log Located On Separate Partition
[ref] | System logs are stored in the /var/log directory.
Ensure that it has its own partition or logical
volume at installation time, or migrate it using LVM. | Rationale: | Placing /var/log in its own partition
enables better separation between log files
and other files in /var/ . | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_partition_for_var_log | Identifiers and References | References:
NT28(R12), NT28(R47), 1, 12, 14, 15, 16, 3, 5, 6, 8, APO11.04, APO13.01, BAI03.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, MEA02.01, 4.3.3.3.9, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.4.4.7, 4.4.2.1, 4.4.2.2, 4.4.2.4, SR 2.10, SR 2.11, SR 2.12, SR 2.8, SR 2.9, SR 3.1, SR 3.5, SR 3.8, SR 4.1, SR 4.3, SR 5.1, SR 5.2, SR 5.3, SR 7.1, SR 7.6, A.12.4.1, A.12.4.2, A.12.4.3, A.12.4.4, A.12.7.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.2.1, A.14.1.3, CM-6(a), AU-4, SC-5(2), PR.PT-1, PR.PT-4, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227 | |
|
Group
GRUB2 bootloader configuration
Group contains 4 rules |
[ref]
During the boot process, the boot loader is
responsible for starting the execution of the kernel and passing
options to it. The boot loader allows for the selection of
different kernels - possibly on different partitions or media.
The default SUSE Linux Enterprise 15 boot loader for x86 systems is called GRUB2.
Options it can pass to the kernel include single-user mode, which
provides root access without any authentication, and the ability to
disable SELinux. To prevent local users from modifying the boot
parameters and endangering security, protect the boot loader configuration
with a password and ensure its configuration file's permissions
are set properly. |
Rule
Verify /boot/grub2/grub.cfg Permissions
[ref] | File permissions for /boot/grub2/grub.cfg should be set to 600.
To properly set the permissions of /boot/grub2/grub.cfg , run the command:
$ sudo chmod 600 /boot/grub2/grub.cfg | Rationale: | Proper permissions ensure that only the root user can modify important boot
parameters. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_permissions_grub2_cfg | Identifiers and References | References:
12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 3.4.5, CCI-000225, 164.308(a)(1)(ii)(B), 164.308(a)(7)(i), 164.308(a)(7)(ii)(A), 164.310(a)(1), 164.310(a)(2)(i), 164.310(a)(2)(ii), 164.310(a)(2)(iii), 164.310(b), 164.310(c), 164.310(d)(1), 164.310(d)(2)(iii), 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5 | |
|
Rule
Verify /boot/grub2/grub.cfg Group Ownership
[ref] | The file /boot/grub2/grub.cfg should
be group-owned by the root group to prevent
destruction or modification of the file.
To properly set the group owner of /boot/grub2/grub.cfg , run the command:
$ sudo chgrp root /boot/grub2/grub.cfg | Rationale: | The root group is a highly-privileged group. Furthermore, the group-owner of this
file should not have any access privileges anyway. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_groupowner_grub2_cfg | Identifiers and References | References:
12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, 5.5.2.2, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 3.4.5, CCI-000225, 164.308(a)(1)(ii)(B), 164.308(a)(7)(i), 164.308(a)(7)(ii)(A), 164.310(a)(1), 164.310(a)(2)(i), 164.310(a)(2)(ii), 164.310(a)(2)(iii), 164.310(b), 164.310(c), 164.310(d)(1), 164.310(d)(2)(iii), 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, Req-7.1 | |
|
Rule
Verify /boot/grub2/grub.cfg User Ownership
[ref] | The file /boot/grub2/grub.cfg should
be owned by the root user to prevent destruction
or modification of the file.
To properly set the owner of /boot/grub2/grub.cfg , run the command:
$ sudo chown root /boot/grub2/grub.cfg | Rationale: | Only root should be able to modify important boot parameters. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_owner_grub2_cfg | Identifiers and References | References:
12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, 5.5.2.2, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 3.4.5, CCI-000225, 164.308(a)(1)(ii)(B), 164.308(a)(7)(i), 164.308(a)(7)(ii)(A), 164.310(a)(1), 164.310(a)(2)(i), 164.310(a)(2)(ii), 164.310(a)(2)(iii), 164.310(b), 164.310(c), 164.310(d)(1), 164.310(d)(2)(iii), 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, Req-7.1 | |
|
Rule
Set Boot Loader Password in grub2
[ref] | The grub2 boot loader should have a superuser account and password
protection enabled to protect boot-time settings.
Since plaintext passwords are a security risk, generate a hash for the pasword
by running the following command:
$ grub2-setpassword
When prompted, enter the password that was selected.
Once the superuser password has been added,
update the
grub.cfg file by running:
grub2-mkconfig -o /boot/grub2/grub.cfg Warning:
To prevent hard-coded passwords, automatic remediation of this control is not available. Remediation
must be automated as a component of machine provisioning, or followed manually as outlined above.
Also, do NOT manually add the superuser account and password to the
grub.cfg file as the grub2-mkconfig command overwrites this file. | Rationale: | Password protection on the boot loader configuration ensures
users with physical access cannot trivially alter
important bootloader settings. These include which kernel to use,
and whether to enter single-user mode. | Severity: | high | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_grub2_password | Identifiers and References | References:
NT28(R17), 1, 11, 12, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, DSS05.02, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS05.10, DSS06.03, DSS06.06, DSS06.10, 3.4.5, CCI-000213, 164.308(a)(1)(ii)(B), 164.308(a)(7)(i), 164.308(a)(7)(ii)(A), 164.310(a)(1), 164.310(a)(2)(i), 164.310(a)(2)(ii), 164.310(a)(2)(iii), 164.310(b), 164.310(c), 164.310(d)(1), 164.310(d)(2)(iii), 4.3.3.2.2, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, A.18.1.4, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.1, A.9.2.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.2.4, A.9.2.6, A.9.3.1, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.2, A.9.4.3, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(a), PR.AC-1, PR.AC-4, PR.AC-6, PR.AC-7, PR.PT-3, FIA_AFL.1, SRG-OS-000080-GPOS-00048 | |
|
Group
File Permissions and Masks
Group contains 7 groups and 54 rules |
[ref]
Traditional Unix security relies heavily on file and
directory permissions to prevent unauthorized users from reading or
modifying files to which they should not have access.
Several of the commands in this section search filesystems
for files or directories with certain characteristics, and are
intended to be run on every local partition on a given system.
When the variable PART appears in one of the commands below,
it means that the command is intended to be run repeatedly, with the
name of each local partition substituted for PART in turn.
The following command prints a list of all xfs partitions on the local
system, which is the default filesystem for SUSE Linux Enterprise 15
installations:
$ mount -t xfs | awk '{print $3}'
For any systems that use a different
local filesystem type, modify this command as appropriate. |
Group
Restrict Programs from Dangerous Execution Patterns
Group contains 2 groups and 5 rules |
[ref]
The recommendations in this section are designed to
ensure that the system's features to protect against potentially
dangerous program execution are activated.
These protections are applied at the system initialization or
kernel level, and defend against certain types of badly-configured
or compromised programs. |
Group
Disable Core Dumps
Group contains 4 rules |
[ref]
A core dump file is the memory image of an executable
program when it was terminated by the operating system due to
errant behavior. In most cases, only software developers
legitimately need to access these files. The core dump files may
also contain sensitive information, or unnecessarily occupy large
amounts of disk space.
Once a hard limit is set in /etc/security/limits.conf , or
to a file within the /etc/security/limits.d/ directory, a
user cannot increase that limit within his or her own session. If access
to core dumps is required, consider restricting them to only
certain users or groups. See the limits.conf man page for more
information.
The core dumps of setuid programs are further protected. The
sysctl variable fs.suid_dumpable controls whether
the kernel allows core dumps from these programs at all. The default
value of 0 is recommended. |
Rule
Disable core dump backtraces
[ref] | The ProcessSizeMax option in [Coredump] section
of /etc/systemd/coredump.conf
specifies the maximum size in bytes of a core which will be processed.
Core dumps exceeding this size may be stored, but the backtrace will not
be generated. Warning:
If the /etc/systemd/coredump.conf file
does not already contain the [Coredump] section,
the value will not be configured correctly. | Rationale: | A core dump includes a memory image taken at the time the operating system
terminates an application. The memory image could contain sensitive data
and is generally useful only for developers or system operators trying to
debug problems.
Enabling core dumps on production systems is not recommended,
however there may be overriding operational requirements to enable advanced
debuging. Permitting temporary enablement of core dumps during such situations
should be reviewed through local needs and policy. | Severity: | unknown | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_coredump_disable_backtraces | Identifiers and References | References:
FMT_SMF_EXT.1, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227 | |
|
Rule
Disable Core Dumps for SUID programs
[ref] | To set the runtime status of the fs.suid_dumpable kernel parameter, run the following command: $ sudo sysctl -w fs.suid_dumpable=0
To make sure that the setting is persistent, add the following line to a file in the directory /etc/sysctl.d : fs.suid_dumpable = 0 | Rationale: | The core dump of a setuid program is more likely to contain
sensitive data, as the program itself runs with greater privileges than the
user who initiated execution of the program. Disabling the ability for any
setuid program to write a core file decreases the risk of unauthorized access
of such data. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sysctl_fs_suid_dumpable | Identifiers and References | References:
NT28(R23), 164.308(a)(1)(ii)(D), 164.308(a)(3), 164.308(a)(4), 164.310(b), 164.310(c), 164.312(a), 164.312(e), SI-11(a), SI-11(b) | |
|
Rule
Disable Core Dumps for All Users
[ref] | To disable core dumps for all users, add the following line to
/etc/security/limits.conf , or to a file within the
/etc/security/limits.d/ directory:
* hard core 0 | Rationale: | A core dump includes a memory image taken at the time the operating system
terminates an application. The memory image could contain sensitive data and is generally useful
only for developers trying to debug problems. | Severity: | unknown | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_disable_users_coredumps | Identifiers and References | References:
1, 12, 13, 15, 16, 2, 7, 8, APO13.01, BAI04.04, DSS01.03, DSS03.05, DSS05.07, SR 6.2, SR 7.1, SR 7.2, A.12.1.3, A.17.2.1, DE.CM-1, PR.DS-4, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227 | |
|
Rule
Disable storing core dump
[ref] | The Storage option in [Coredump] section
of /etc/systemd/coredump.conf
can be set to none to disable storing core dumps permanently. Warning:
If the /etc/systemd/coredump.conf file
does not already contain the [Coredump] section,
the value will not be configured correctly. | Rationale: | A core dump includes a memory image taken at the time the operating system
terminates an application. The memory image could contain sensitive data
and is generally useful only for developers or system operators trying to
debug problems. Enabling core dumps on production systems is not recommended,
however there may be overriding operational requirements to enable advanced
debuging. Permitting temporary enablement of core dumps during such situations
should be reviewed through local needs and policy. | Severity: | unknown | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_coredump_disable_storage | Identifiers and References | References:
FMT_SMF_EXT.1, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227 | |
|
Group
Enable ExecShield
Group contains 1 rule |
[ref]
ExecShield describes kernel features that provide
protection against exploitation of memory corruption errors such as buffer
overflows. These features include random placement of the stack and other
memory regions, prevention of execution in memory that should only hold data,
and special handling of text buffers. These protections are enabled by default
on 32-bit systems and controlled through sysctl variables
kernel.exec-shield and kernel.randomize_va_space . On the latest
64-bit systems, kernel.exec-shield cannot be enabled or disabled with
sysctl . |
Rule
Enable Randomized Layout of Virtual Address Space
[ref] | To set the runtime status of the kernel.randomize_va_space kernel parameter, run the following command: $ sudo sysctl -w kernel.randomize_va_space=2
To make sure that the setting is persistent, add the following line to a file in the directory /etc/sysctl.d : kernel.randomize_va_space = 2 | Rationale: | Address space layout randomization (ASLR) makes it more difficult for an
attacker to predict the location of attack code they have introduced into a
process's address space during an attempt at exploitation. Additionally,
ASLR makes it more difficult for an attacker to know the location of
existing code in order to re-purpose it using return oriented programming
(ROP) techniques. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sysctl_kernel_randomize_va_space | Identifiers and References | References:
NT28(R23), 3.1.7, CCI-000366, CCI-002824, 164.308(a)(1)(ii)(D), 164.308(a)(3), 164.308(a)(4), 164.310(b), 164.310(c), 164.312(a), 164.312(e), SC-30, SC-30(2), CM-6(a), SRG-OS-000433-GPOS-00193, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227 | |
|
Group
Restrict Partition Mount Options
Group contains 13 rules |
[ref]
System partitions can be mounted with certain options
that limit what files on those partitions can do. These options
are set in the /etc/fstab configuration file, and can be
used to make certain types of malicious behavior more difficult. |
Rule
Add nodev Option to /home
[ref] | The nodev mount option can be used to prevent device files from
being created in /home .
Legitimate character and block devices should exist only in
the /dev directory on the root partition or within chroot
jails built for system services.
Add the nodev option to the fourth column of
/etc/fstab for the line which controls mounting of
/home . | Rationale: | The only legitimate location for device files is the /dev directory
located on the root partition. The only exception to this is chroot jails. | Severity: | unknown | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_mount_option_home_nodev | Identifiers and References | References:
NT28(R12), 1.1.15, SRG-OS-000368-GPOS-00154 | |
|
Rule
Add nodev Option to Removable Media Partitions
[ref] | The nodev mount option prevents files from being
interpreted as character or block devices.
Legitimate character and block devices should exist only in
the /dev directory on the root partition or within chroot
jails built for system services.
Add the nodev option to the fourth column of
/etc/fstab for the line which controls mounting of
any removable media partitions. | Rationale: | The only legitimate location for device files is the /dev directory
located on the root partition. An exception to this is chroot jails, and it is
not advised to set nodev on partitions which contain their root
filesystems. | Severity: | low | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_mount_option_nodev_removable_partitions | Identifiers and References | References:
1.1.19, 11, 12, 13, 14, 16, 3, 8, 9, APO13.01, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS01.04, DSS05.02, DSS05.03, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.06, DSS05.07, DSS06.03, DSS06.06, 4.3.3.2.2, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 7.6, A.11.2.6, A.11.2.9, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.13.1.1, A.13.2.1, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.6.2.1, A.6.2.2, A.7.1.1, A.8.2.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.8.3.1, A.8.3.3, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.1, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), AC-6, AC-6(1), MP-7, PR.AC-3, PR.AC-6, PR.IP-1, PR.PT-2, PR.PT-3 | |
|
Rule
Add nosuid Option to /tmp
[ref] | The nosuid mount option can be used to prevent
execution of setuid programs in /tmp . The SUID and SGID permissions
should not be required in these world-writable directories.
Add the nosuid option to the fourth column of
/etc/fstab for the line which controls mounting of
/tmp . | Rationale: | The presence of SUID and SGID executables should be tightly controlled. Users
should not be able to execute SUID or SGID binaries from temporary storage partitions. | Severity: | unknown | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_mount_option_tmp_nosuid | Identifiers and References | References:
NT28(R12), 1.1.5, 11, 13, 14, 3, 8, 9, APO13.01, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.05, DSS05.06, DSS06.06, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 7.6, A.11.2.9, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.8.2.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.8.3.1, A.8.3.3, A.9.1.2, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), AC-6, AC-6(1), MP-7, PR.IP-1, PR.PT-2, PR.PT-3, SRG-OS-000368-GPOS-00154 | |
|
Rule
Add nosuid Option to /dev/shm
[ref] | The nosuid mount option can be used to prevent execution
of setuid programs in /dev/shm . The SUID and SGID permissions should not
be required in these world-writable directories.
Add the nosuid option to the fourth column of
/etc/fstab for the line which controls mounting of
/dev/shm . | Rationale: | The presence of SUID and SGID executables should be tightly controlled. Users
should not be able to execute SUID or SGID binaries from temporary storage partitions. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_mount_option_dev_shm_nosuid | Identifiers and References | References:
1.1.18, 11, 13, 14, 3, 8, 9, APO13.01, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.05, DSS05.06, DSS06.06, CCI-001764, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 7.6, A.11.2.9, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.8.2.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.8.3.1, A.8.3.3, A.9.1.2, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), AC-6, AC-6(1), MP-7, PR.IP-1, PR.PT-2, PR.PT-3, SRG-OS-000368-GPOS-00154 | |
|
Rule
Add noexec Option to /dev/shm
[ref] | The noexec mount option can be used to prevent binaries
from being executed out of /dev/shm .
It can be dangerous to allow the execution of binaries
from world-writable temporary storage directories such as /dev/shm .
Add the noexec option to the fourth column of
/etc/fstab for the line which controls mounting of
/dev/shm . | Rationale: | Allowing users to execute binaries from world-writable directories
such as /dev/shm can expose the system to potential compromise. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_mount_option_dev_shm_noexec | Identifiers and References | References:
1.1.17, 11, 13, 14, 3, 8, 9, APO13.01, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.05, DSS05.06, DSS06.06, CCI-001764, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 7.6, A.11.2.9, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.8.2.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.8.3.1, A.8.3.3, A.9.1.2, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), AC-6, AC-6(1), MP-7, PR.IP-1, PR.PT-2, PR.PT-3, SRG-OS-000368-GPOS-00154 | |
|
Rule
Add noexec Option to /var/tmp
[ref] | The noexec mount option can be used to prevent binaries
from being executed out of /var/tmp .
Add the noexec option to the fourth column of
/etc/fstab for the line which controls mounting of
/var/tmp . | Rationale: | Allowing users to execute binaries from world-writable directories
such as /var/tmp should never be necessary in normal operation and
can expose the system to potential compromise. | Severity: | unknown | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_mount_option_var_tmp_noexec | Identifiers and References | References:
NT28(R12), 1.1.11, SRG-OS-000368-GPOS-00154 | |
|
Rule
Add nosuid Option to Removable Media Partitions
[ref] | The nosuid mount option prevents set-user-identifier (SUID)
and set-group-identifier (SGID) permissions from taking effect. These permissions
allow users to execute binaries with the same permissions as the owner and group
of the file respectively. Users should not be allowed to introduce SUID and SGID
files into the system via partitions mounted from removeable media.
Add the nosuid option to the fourth column of
/etc/fstab for the line which controls mounting of
any removable media partitions. | Rationale: | The presence of SUID and SGID executables should be tightly controlled. Allowing
users to introduce SUID or SGID binaries from partitions mounted off of
removable media would allow them to introduce their own highly-privileged programs. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_mount_option_nosuid_removable_partitions | Identifiers and References | References:
1.1.21, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, 8, 9, APO01.06, APO13.01, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS01.04, DSS05.02, DSS05.03, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.06, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, DSS06.03, DSS06.06, CCI-000366, 4.3.3.2.2, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 5.2, SR 7.6, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.11.2.6, A.11.2.9, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.6.1.2, A.6.2.1, A.6.2.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.8.3.1, A.8.3.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.1, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), AC-6, AC-6(1), MP-7, PR.AC-3, PR.AC-4, PR.AC-6, PR.DS-5, PR.IP-1, PR.PT-2, PR.PT-3, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227 | |
|
Rule
Add nodev Option to /tmp
[ref] | The nodev mount option can be used to prevent device files from
being created in /tmp . Legitimate character and block devices
should not exist within temporary directories like /tmp .
Add the nodev option to the fourth column of
/etc/fstab for the line which controls mounting of
/tmp . | Rationale: | The only legitimate location for device files is the /dev directory
located on the root partition. The only exception to this is chroot jails. | Severity: | unknown | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_mount_option_tmp_nodev | Identifiers and References | References:
NT28(R12), 1.1.4, 11, 13, 14, 3, 8, 9, APO13.01, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.05, DSS05.06, DSS06.06, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 7.6, A.11.2.9, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.8.2.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.8.3.1, A.8.3.3, A.9.1.2, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), AC-6, AC-6(1), MP-7, PR.IP-1, PR.PT-2, PR.PT-3, SRG-OS-000368-GPOS-00154 | |
|
Rule
Add nosuid Option to /var/tmp
[ref] | The nosuid mount option can be used to prevent
execution of setuid programs in /var/tmp . The SUID and SGID permissions
should not be required in these world-writable directories.
Add the nosuid option to the fourth column of
/etc/fstab for the line which controls mounting of
/var/tmp . | Rationale: | The presence of SUID and SGID executables should be tightly controlled. Users
should not be able to execute SUID or SGID binaries from temporary storage partitions. | Severity: | unknown | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_mount_option_var_tmp_nosuid | Identifiers and References | References:
NT28(R12), 1.1.10, SRG-OS-000368-GPOS-00154 | |
|
Rule
Add nodev Option to /dev/shm
[ref] | The nodev mount option can be used to prevent creation of device
files in /dev/shm . Legitimate character and block devices should
not exist within temporary directories like /dev/shm .
Add the nodev option to the fourth column of
/etc/fstab for the line which controls mounting of
/dev/shm . | Rationale: | The only legitimate location for device files is the /dev directory
located on the root partition. The only exception to this is chroot jails. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_mount_option_dev_shm_nodev | Identifiers and References | References:
1.1.16, 11, 13, 14, 3, 8, 9, APO13.01, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.05, DSS05.06, DSS06.06, CCI-001764, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 7.6, A.11.2.9, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.8.2.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.8.3.1, A.8.3.3, A.9.1.2, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), AC-6, AC-6(1), MP-7, PR.IP-1, PR.PT-2, PR.PT-3, SRG-OS-000368-GPOS-00154 | |
|
Rule
Add noexec Option to Removable Media Partitions
[ref] | The noexec mount option prevents the direct execution of binaries
on the mounted filesystem. Preventing the direct execution of binaries from
removable media (such as a USB key) provides a defense against malicious
software that may be present on such untrusted media.
Add the noexec option to the fourth column of
/etc/fstab for the line which controls mounting of
any removable media partitions. | Rationale: | Allowing users to execute binaries from removable media such as USB keys exposes
the system to potential compromise. | Severity: | unknown | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_mount_option_noexec_removable_partitions | Identifiers and References | References:
1.1.20, 11, 12, 13, 14, 16, 3, 8, 9, APO13.01, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS01.04, DSS05.02, DSS05.03, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.06, DSS05.07, DSS06.03, DSS06.06, CCI-000087, 4.3.3.2.2, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 7.6, A.11.2.6, A.11.2.9, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.13.1.1, A.13.2.1, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.6.2.1, A.6.2.2, A.7.1.1, A.8.2.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.8.3.1, A.8.3.3, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.1, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), AC-6, AC-6(1), MP-7, PR.AC-3, PR.AC-6, PR.IP-1, PR.PT-2, PR.PT-3 | |
|
Rule
Add noexec Option to /tmp
[ref] | The noexec mount option can be used to prevent binaries
from being executed out of /tmp .
Add the noexec option to the fourth column of
/etc/fstab for the line which controls mounting of
/tmp . | Rationale: | Allowing users to execute binaries from world-writable directories
such as /tmp should never be necessary in normal operation and
can expose the system to potential compromise. | Severity: | unknown | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_mount_option_tmp_noexec | Identifiers and References | References:
NT28(R12), 1.1.6, 11, 13, 14, 3, 8, 9, APO13.01, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.05, DSS05.06, DSS06.06, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 7.6, A.11.2.9, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.8.2.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.8.3.1, A.8.3.3, A.9.1.2, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), AC-6, AC-6(1), MP-7, PR.IP-1, PR.PT-2, PR.PT-3, SRG-OS-000368-GPOS-00154 | |
|
Rule
Add nodev Option to /var/tmp
[ref] | The nodev mount option can be used to prevent device files from
being created in /var/tmp . Legitimate character and block devices
should not exist within temporary directories like /var/tmp .
Add the nodev option to the fourth column of
/etc/fstab for the line which controls mounting of
/var/tmp . | Rationale: | The only legitimate location for device files is the /dev directory
located on the root partition. The only exception to this is chroot jails. | Severity: | unknown | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_mount_option_var_tmp_nodev | Identifiers and References | References:
NT28(R12), 1.1.9, SRG-OS-000368-GPOS-00154 | |
|
Group
Restrict Dynamic Mounting and Unmounting of
Filesystems
Group contains 6 rules |
[ref]
Linux includes a number of facilities for the automated addition
and removal of filesystems on a running system. These facilities may be
necessary in many environments, but this capability also carries some risk -- whether direct
risk from allowing users to introduce arbitrary filesystems,
or risk that software flaws in the automated mount facility itself could
allow an attacker to compromise the system.
This command can be used to list the types of filesystems that are
available to the currently executing kernel:
$ find /lib/modules/`uname -r`/kernel/fs -type f -name '*.ko'
If these filesystems are not required then they can be explicitly disabled
in a configuratio file in /etc/modprobe.d . |
Rule
Disable the Automounter
[ref] | The autofs daemon mounts and unmounts filesystems, such as user
home directories shared via NFS, on demand. In addition, autofs can be used to handle
removable media, and the default configuration provides the cdrom device as /misc/cd .
However, this method of providing access to removable media is not common, so autofs
can almost always be disabled if NFS is not in use. Even if NFS is required, it may be
possible to configure filesystem mounts statically by editing /etc/fstab
rather than relying on the automounter.
The autofs service can be disabled with the following command:
$ sudo systemctl disable autofs.service
The autofs service can be masked with the following command:
$ sudo systemctl mask autofs.service | Rationale: | Disabling the automounter permits the administrator to
statically control filesystem mounting through /etc/fstab .
Additionally, automatically mounting filesystems permits easy introduction of
unknown devices, thereby facilitating malicious activity. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_service_autofs_disabled | Identifiers and References | References:
1.1.23, 1, 12, 15, 16, 5, APO13.01, DSS01.04, DSS05.03, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS05.10, DSS06.03, DSS06.10, 3.4.6, CCI-000366, CCI-000778, CCI-001958, 164.308(a)(3)(i), 164.308(a)(3)(ii)(A), 164.310(d)(1), 164.310(d)(2), 164.312(a)(1), 164.312(a)(2)(iv), 164.312(b), 4.3.3.2.2, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.4, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.6, A.11.2.6, A.13.1.1, A.13.2.1, A.18.1.4, A.6.2.1, A.6.2.2, A.7.1.1, A.9.2.1, A.9.2.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.2.4, A.9.2.6, A.9.3.1, A.9.4.2, A.9.4.3, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), MP-7, PR.AC-1, PR.AC-3, PR.AC-6, PR.AC-7, SRG-OS-000114-GPOS-00059, SRG-OS-000378-GPOS-00163, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227 | |
|
Rule
Disable Modprobe Loading of USB Storage Driver
[ref] | To prevent USB storage devices from being used, configure the kernel module loading system
to prevent automatic loading of the USB storage driver.
To configure the system to prevent the usb-storage
kernel module from being loaded, add the following line to a file in the directory /etc/modprobe.d :
install usb-storage /bin/true
This will prevent the modprobe program from loading the usb-storage
module, but will not prevent an administrator (or another program) from using the
insmod program to load the module manually. | Rationale: | USB storage devices such as thumb drives can be used to introduce
malicious software. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_kernel_module_usb-storage_disabled | Identifiers and References | References:
1.1.3, 1, 12, 15, 16, 5, APO13.01, DSS01.04, DSS05.03, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS05.10, DSS06.03, DSS06.10, 3.1.21, CCI-000366, CCI-000778, CCI-001958, 164.308(a)(3)(i), 164.308(a)(3)(ii)(A), 164.310(d)(1), 164.310(d)(2), 164.312(a)(1), 164.312(a)(2)(iv), 164.312(b), 4.3.3.2.2, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.4, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.6, A.11.2.6, A.13.1.1, A.13.2.1, A.18.1.4, A.6.2.1, A.6.2.2, A.7.1.1, A.9.2.1, A.9.2.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.2.4, A.9.2.6, A.9.3.1, A.9.4.2, A.9.4.3, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), MP-7, PR.AC-1, PR.AC-3, PR.AC-6, PR.AC-7, SRG-OS-000114-GPOS-00059, SRG-OS-000378-GPOS-0016, SRG-OS-000378-GPOS-00163, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227 | |
|
Rule
Disable Mounting of cramfs
[ref] |
To configure the system to prevent the cramfs
kernel module from being loaded, add the following line to a file in the directory /etc/modprobe.d :
install cramfs /bin/true
This effectively prevents usage of this uncommon filesystem.
The cramfs filesystem type is a compressed read-only
Linux filesystem embedded in small footprint systems. A
cramfs image can be used without having to first
decompress the image. | Rationale: | Removing support for unneeded filesystem types reduces the local attack surface
of the server. | Severity: | low | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_kernel_module_cramfs_disabled | Identifiers and References | References:
1.1.1.1, 11, 14, 3, 9, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.05, DSS06.06, 3.4.6, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 7.6, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.9.1.2, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, SRG-OS-000095-GPOS-00049 | |
|
Rule
Disable Mounting of squashfs
[ref] |
To configure the system to prevent the squashfs
kernel module from being loaded, add the following line to a file in the directory /etc/modprobe.d :
install squashfs /bin/true
This effectively prevents usage of this uncommon filesystem.
The squashfs filesystem type is a compressed read-only Linux
filesystem embedded in small footprint systems (similar to
cramfs ). A squashfs image can be used without having
to first decompress the image. | Rationale: | Removing support for unneeded filesystem types reduces the local attack
surface of the system. | Severity: | low | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_kernel_module_squashfs_disabled | Identifiers and References | References:
1.1.1.6, 11, 14, 3, 9, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.05, DSS06.06, 3.4.6, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 7.6, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.9.1.2, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3 | |
|
Rule
Disable Mounting of vFAT filesystems
[ref] |
To configure the system to prevent the vfat
kernel module from being loaded, add the following line to a file in the directory /etc/modprobe.d :
install vfat /bin/true
This effectively prevents usage of this uncommon filesystem.
The vFAT filesystem format is primarily used on older
windows systems and portable USB drives or flash modules. It comes
in three types FAT12 , FAT16 , and FAT32
all of which are supported by the vfat kernel module. | Rationale: | Removing support for unneeded filesystems reduces the local attack
surface of the system. | Severity: | low | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_kernel_module_vfat_disabled | Identifiers and References | References:
1.1.1.8, 11, 14, 3, 9, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.05, DSS06.06, 3.4.6, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 7.6, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.9.1.2, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3 | |
|
Rule
Disable Mounting of udf
[ref] |
To configure the system to prevent the udf
kernel module from being loaded, add the following line to a file in the directory /etc/modprobe.d :
install udf /bin/true
This effectively prevents usage of this uncommon filesystem.
The udf filesystem type is the universal disk format
used to implement the ISO/IEC 13346 and ECMA-167 specifications.
This is an open vendor filesystem type for data storage on a broad
range of media. This filesystem type is neccessary to support
writing DVDs and newer optical disc formats. | Rationale: | Removing support for unneeded filesystem types reduces the local
attack surface of the system. | Severity: | low | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_kernel_module_udf_disabled | Identifiers and References | References:
1.1.1.7, 11, 14, 3, 9, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.05, DSS06.06, 3.4.6, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 7.6, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.9.1.2, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3 | |
|
Group
Verify Permissions on Important Files and
Directories
Group contains 1 group and 30 rules |
[ref]
Permissions for many files on a system must be set
restrictively to ensure sensitive information is properly protected.
This section discusses important
permission restrictions which can be verified
to ensure that no harmful discrepancies have
arisen. |
Group
Verify Permissions on Files with Local Account Information and Credentials
Group contains 24 rules |
[ref]
The default restrictive permissions for files which act as
important security databases such as passwd , shadow ,
group , and gshadow files must be maintained. Many utilities
need read access to the passwd file in order to function properly, but
read access to the shadow file allows malicious attacks against system
passwords, and should never be enabled. |
Rule
Verify Group Who Owns group File
[ref] | To properly set the group owner of /etc/group , run the command: $ sudo chgrp root /etc/group | Rationale: | The /etc/group file contains information regarding groups that are configured
on the system. Protection of this file is important for system security. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_groupowner_etc_group | Identifiers and References | References:
12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, 5.5.2.2, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, Req-8.7.c | |
|
Rule
Verify Group Who Owns gshadow File
[ref] | To properly set the group owner of /etc/gshadow , run the command: $ sudo chgrp root /etc/gshadow | Rationale: | The /etc/gshadow file contains group password hashes. Protection of this file
is critical for system security. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_groupowner_etc_gshadow | Identifiers and References | References:
12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5 | |
|
Rule
Verify User Who Owns group File
[ref] | To properly set the owner of /etc/group , run the command: $ sudo chown root /etc/group | Rationale: | The /etc/group file contains information regarding groups that are configured
on the system. Protection of this file is important for system security. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_owner_etc_group | Identifiers and References | References:
6.1.6, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, 5.5.2.2, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, Req-8.7.c | |
|
Rule
Verify Group Who Owns passwd File
[ref] | To properly set the group owner of /etc/passwd , run the command: $ sudo chgrp root /etc/passwd | Rationale: | The /etc/passwd file contains information about the users that are configured on
the system. Protection of this file is critical for system security. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_groupowner_etc_passwd | Identifiers and References | References:
12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, 5.5.2.2, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, Req-8.7.c | |
|
Rule
Verify User Who Owns Backup gshadow File
[ref] | To properly set the owner of /etc/gshadow- , run the command: $ sudo chown root /etc/gshadow- | Rationale: | The /etc/gshadow- file is a backup of /etc/gshadow , and as such,
it contains group password hashes. Protection of this file is critical for system security. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_owner_backup_etc_gshadow | Identifiers and References | | |
|
Rule
Verify Permissions on Backup passwd File
[ref] |
To properly set the permissions of /etc/passwd- , run the command:
$ sudo chmod 0644 /etc/passwd- | Rationale: | The /etc/passwd- file is a backup file of /etc/passwd , and as such,
it contains information about the users that are configured on the system.
Protection of this file is critical for system security. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_permissions_backup_etc_passwd | Identifiers and References | References:
6.1.7 | |
|
Rule
Verify User Who Owns shadow File
[ref] | To properly set the owner of /etc/shadow , run the command: $ sudo chown root /etc/shadow | Rationale: | The /etc/shadow file contains the list of local
system accounts and stores password hashes. Protection of this file is
critical for system security. Failure to give ownership of this file
to root provides the designated owner with access to sensitive information
which could weaken the system security posture. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_owner_etc_shadow | Identifiers and References | References:
NT28(R36), 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, 5.5.2.2, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, Req-8.7.c | |
|
Rule
Verify Permissions on shadow File
[ref] |
To properly set the permissions of /etc/shadow , run the command:
$ sudo chmod 0000 /etc/shadow | Rationale: | The /etc/shadow file contains the list of local
system accounts and stores password hashes. Protection of this file is
critical for system security. Failure to give ownership of this file
to root provides the designated owner with access to sensitive information
which could weaken the system security posture. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_permissions_etc_shadow | Identifiers and References | References:
NT28(R36), 6.1.5, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, 5.5.2.2, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, Req-8.7.c | |
|
Rule
Verify Group Who Owns Backup group File
[ref] | To properly set the group owner of /etc/group- , run the command: $ sudo chgrp root /etc/group- | Rationale: | The /etc/group- file is a backup file of /etc/group , and as such,
it contains information regarding groups that are configured on the system.
Protection of this file is important for system security. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_groupowner_backup_etc_group | Identifiers and References | | |
|
Rule
Verify Permissions on gshadow File
[ref] |
To properly set the permissions of /etc/gshadow , run the command:
$ sudo chmod 0000 /etc/gshadow | Rationale: | The /etc/gshadow file contains group password hashes. Protection of this file
is critical for system security. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_permissions_etc_gshadow | Identifiers and References | References:
NT28(R36), 6.1.2, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5 | |
|
Rule
Verify User Who Owns Backup shadow File
[ref] | To properly set the group owner of /etc/shadow- , run the command: $ sudo chgrp root /etc/shadow- | Rationale: | The /etc/shadow- file is a backup file of /etc/shadow , and as such,
it contains the list of local system accounts and password hashes.
Protection of this file is critical for system security. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_groupowner_backup_etc_shadow | Identifiers and References | | |
|
Rule
Verify Permissions on Backup group File
[ref] |
To properly set the permissions of /etc/group- , run the command:
$ sudo chmod 0644 /etc/group- | Rationale: | The /etc/group- file is a backup file of /etc/group , and as such,
it contains information regarding groups that are configured on the system.
Protection of this file is important for system security. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_permissions_backup_etc_group | Identifiers and References | References:
6.1.9 | |
|
Rule
Verify Permissions on Backup gshadow File
[ref] |
To properly set the permissions of /etc/gshadow- , run the command:
$ sudo chmod 0000 /etc/gshadow- | Rationale: | The /etc/gshadow- file is a backup of /etc/gshadow , and as such,
it contains group password hashes. Protection of this file is critical for system security. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_permissions_backup_etc_gshadow | Identifiers and References | References:
6.1.3 | |
|
Rule
Verify User Who Owns gshadow File
[ref] | To properly set the owner of /etc/gshadow , run the command: $ sudo chown root /etc/gshadow | Rationale: | The /etc/gshadow file contains group password hashes. Protection of this file
is critical for system security. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_owner_etc_gshadow | Identifiers and References | References:
NT28(R36), 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5 | |
|
Rule
Verify Group Who Owns Backup gshadow File
[ref] | To properly set the group owner of /etc/gshadow- , run the command: $ sudo chgrp root /etc/gshadow- | Rationale: | The /etc/gshadow- file is a backup of /etc/gshadow , and as such,
it contains group password hashes. Protection of this file is critical for system security. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_groupowner_backup_etc_gshadow | Identifiers and References | | |
|
Rule
Verify Group Who Owns Backup shadow File
[ref] | To properly set the owner of /etc/shadow- , run the command: $ sudo chown root /etc/shadow- | Rationale: | The /etc/shadow- file is a backup file of /etc/shadow , and as such,
it contains the list of local system accounts and password hashes.
Protection of this file is critical for system security. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_owner_backup_etc_shadow | Identifiers and References | | |
|
Rule
Verify Permissions on Backup shadow File
[ref] |
To properly set the permissions of /etc/shadow- , run the command:
$ sudo chmod 0000 /etc/shadow- | Rationale: | The /etc/shadow- file is a backup file of /etc/shadow , and as such,
it contains the list of local system accounts and password hashes.
Protection of this file is critical for system security. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_permissions_backup_etc_shadow | Identifiers and References | References:
6.1.8 | |
|
Rule
Verify Group Who Owns shadow File
[ref] | To properly set the group owner of /etc/shadow , run the command: $ sudo chgrp root /etc/shadow | Rationale: | The /etc/shadow file stores password hashes. Protection of this file is
critical for system security. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_groupowner_etc_shadow | Identifiers and References | References:
12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, 5.5.2.2, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, Req-8.7.c | |
|
Rule
Verify User Who Owns Backup group File
[ref] | To properly set the owner of /etc/group- , run the command: $ sudo chown root /etc/group- | Rationale: | The /etc/group- file is a backup file of /etc/group , and as such,
it contains information regarding groups that are configured on the system.
Protection of this file is important for system security. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_owner_backup_etc_group | Identifiers and References | | |
|
Rule
Verify User Who Owns passwd File
[ref] | To properly set the owner of /etc/passwd , run the command: $ sudo chown root /etc/passwd | Rationale: | The /etc/passwd file contains information about the users that are configured on
the system. Protection of this file is critical for system security. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_owner_etc_passwd | Identifiers and References | References:
12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, 5.5.2.2, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, Req-8.7.c | |
|
Rule
Verify User Who Owns Backup passwd File
[ref] | To properly set the owner of /etc/passwd- , run the command: $ sudo chown root /etc/passwd- | Rationale: | The /etc/passwd- file is a backup file of /etc/passwd , and as such,
it contains information about the users that are configured on the system.
Protection of this file is critical for system security. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_owner_backup_etc_passwd | Identifiers and References | | |
|
Rule
Verify Permissions on group File
[ref] |
To properly set the permissions of /etc/passwd , run the command:
$ sudo chmod 0644 /etc/passwd | Rationale: | The /etc/group file contains information regarding groups that are configured
on the system. Protection of this file is important for system security. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_permissions_etc_group | Identifiers and References | References:
6.1.6, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, 5.5.2.2, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, Req-8.7.c | |
|
Rule
Verify Permissions on passwd File
[ref] |
To properly set the permissions of /etc/passwd , run the command:
$ sudo chmod 0644 /etc/passwd | Rationale: | If the /etc/passwd file is writable by a group-owner or the
world the risk of its compromise is increased. The file contains the list of
accounts on the system and associated information, and protection of this file
is critical for system security. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_permissions_etc_passwd | Identifiers and References | References:
6.1.4, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, 5.5.2.2, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, Req-8.7.c | |
|
Rule
Verify Group Who Owns Backup passwd File
[ref] | To properly set the group owner of /etc/passwd- , run the command: $ sudo chgrp root /etc/passwd- | Rationale: | The /etc/passwd- file is a backup file of /etc/passwd , and as such,
it contains information about the users that are configured on the system.
Protection of this file is critical for system security. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_groupowner_backup_etc_passwd | Identifiers and References | | |
|
Rule
Ensure All Files Are Owned by a Group
[ref] | If any files are not owned by a group, then the
cause of their lack of group-ownership should be investigated.
Following this, the files should be deleted or assigned to an
appropriate group. Warning:
This rule only considers local groups.
If you have your groups defined outside /etc/group , the rule won't consider those. | Rationale: | Unowned files do not directly imply a security problem, but they are generally
a sign that something is amiss. They may
be caused by an intruder, by incorrect software installation or
draft software removal, or by failure to remove all files belonging
to a deleted account. The files should be repaired so they
will not cause problems when accounts are created in the future,
and the cause should be discovered and addressed. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_permissions_ungroupowned | Identifiers and References | References:
6.1.12, 1, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, APO01.06, DSS05.02, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS05.10, DSS06.02, DSS06.03, DSS06.06, DSS06.10, CCI-000366, CCI-002165, 4.3.3.2.2, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.18.1.4, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.1, A.9.2.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.2.4, A.9.2.6, A.9.3.1, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.2, A.9.4.3, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-1, PR.AC-4, PR.AC-6, PR.AC-7, PR.DS-5, PR.PT-3, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227 | |
|
Rule
Ensure All SGID Executables Are Authorized
[ref] | The SGID (set group id) bit should be set only on files that were
installed via authorized means. A straightforward means of identifying
unauthorized SGID files is determine if any were not installed as part of an
RPM package, which is cryptographically verified. Investigate the origin
of any unpackaged SGID files.
This configuration check considers authorized SGID files which were installed via RPM.
It is assumed that when an individual has sudo access to install an RPM
and all packages are signed with an organizationally-recognized GPG key,
the software should be considered an approved package on the system.
Any SGID file not deployed through an RPM will be flagged for further review. | Rationale: | Executable files with the SGID permission run with the privileges of
the owner of the file. SGID files of uncertain provenance could allow for
unprivileged users to elevate privileges. The presence of these files should be
strictly controlled on the system. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_permissions_unauthorized_sgid | Identifiers and References | References:
NT28(R37), NT28(R38), 6.1.14, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5 | |
|
Rule
Ensure No World-Writable Files Exist
[ref] | It is generally a good idea to remove global (other) write
access to a file when it is discovered. However, check with
documentation for specific applications before making changes.
Also, monitor for recurring world-writable files, as these may be
symptoms of a misconfigured application or user account. Finally,
this applies to real files and not virtual files that are a part of
pseudo file systems such as sysfs or procfs . | Rationale: | Data in world-writable files can be modified by any
user on the system. In almost all circumstances, files can be
configured using a combination of user and group permissions to
support whatever legitimate access is needed without the risk
caused by world-writable files. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_permissions_unauthorized_world_writable | Identifiers and References | References:
6.1.10, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5 | |
|
Rule
Ensure All SUID Executables Are Authorized
[ref] | The SUID (set user id) bit should be set only on files that were
installed via authorized means. A straightforward means of identifying
unauthorized SUID files is determine if any were not installed as part of an
RPM package, which is cryptographically verified. Investigate the origin
of any unpackaged SUID files.
This configuration check considers authorized SUID files which were installed via RPM.
It is assumed that when an individual has sudo access to install an RPM
and all packages are signed with an organizationally-recognized GPG key,
the software should be considered an approved package on the system.
Any SUID file not deployed through an RPM will be flagged for further review. | Rationale: | Executable files with the SUID permission run with the privileges of
the owner of the file. SUID files of uncertain provenance could allow for
unprivileged users to elevate privileges. The presence of these files should be
strictly controlled on the system. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_permissions_unauthorized_suid | Identifiers and References | References:
NT28(R37), NT28(R38), 6.1.13, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5 | |
|
Rule
Verify that All World-Writable Directories Have Sticky Bits Set
[ref] | When the so-called 'sticky bit' is set on a directory,
only the owner of a given file may remove that file from the
directory. Without the sticky bit, any user with write access to a
directory may remove any file in the directory. Setting the sticky
bit prevents users from removing each other's files. In cases where
there is no reason for a directory to be world-writable, a better
solution is to remove that permission rather than to set the sticky
bit. However, if a directory is used by a particular application,
consult that application's documentation instead of blindly
changing modes.
To set the sticky bit on a world-writable directory DIR, run the
following command:
$ sudo chmod +t DIR | Rationale: | Failing to set the sticky bit on public directories allows unauthorized
users to delete files in the directory structure.
The only authorized public directories are those temporary directories
supplied with the system, or those designed to be temporary file
repositories. The setting is normally reserved for directories used by the
system, by users for temporary file storage (such as /tmp ), and
for directories requiring global read/write access. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_dir_perms_world_writable_sticky_bits | Identifiers and References | References:
1.1.22, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5 | |
|
Rule
Ensure All Files Are Owned by a User
[ref] | If any files are not owned by a user, then the
cause of their lack of ownership should be investigated.
Following this, the files should be deleted or assigned to an
appropriate user. Warning:
For this rule to evaluate centralized user accounts, getent must be working properly
so that running the command getent passwd returns a list of all users in your organization.
If using the System Security Services Daemon (SSSD), enumerate = true must be configured
in your organization's domain to return a complete list of users Warning:
Enabling this rule will result in slower scan times depending on the size of your organization
and number of centralized users. | Rationale: | Unowned files do not directly imply a security problem, but they are generally
a sign that something is amiss. They may
be caused by an intruder, by incorrect software installation or
draft software removal, or by failure to remove all files belonging
to a deleted account. The files should be repaired so they
will not cause problems when accounts are created in the future,
and the cause should be discovered and addressed. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_no_files_unowned_by_user | Identifiers and References | References:
6.1.11, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, 9, APO01.06, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, DSS06.03, DSS06.06, CCI-000366, CCI-002165, 4.3.3.2.2, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 5.2, SR 7.6, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.1, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.AC-6, PR.DS-5, PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227 | |
|
Group
Network Configuration and Firewalls
Group contains 15 groups and 29 rules |
[ref]
Most systems must be connected to a network of some
sort, and this brings with it the substantial risk of network
attack. This section discusses the security impact of decisions
about networking which must be made when configuring a system.
This section also discusses firewalls, network access
controls, and other network security frameworks, which allow
system-level rules to be written that can limit an attackers' ability
to connect to your system. These rules can specify that network
traffic should be allowed or denied from certain IP addresses,
hosts, and networks. The rules can also specify which of the
system's network services are available to particular hosts or
networks. |
Group
Wireless Networking
Group contains 1 group and 1 rule |
[ref]
Wireless networking, such as 802.11
(WiFi) and Bluetooth, can present a security risk to sensitive or
classified systems and networks. Wireless networking hardware is
much more likely to be included in laptop or portable systems than
in desktops or servers.
Removal of hardware provides the greatest assurance that the wireless
capability remains disabled. Acquisition policies often include provisions to
prevent the purchase of equipment that will be used in sensitive spaces and
includes wireless capabilities. If it is impractical to remove the wireless
hardware, and policy permits the device to enter sensitive spaces as long
as wireless is disabled, efforts should instead focus on disabling wireless capability
via software. |
Group
Disable Wireless Through Software Configuration
Group contains 1 rule |
[ref]
If it is impossible to remove the wireless hardware
from the device in question, disable as much of it as possible
through software. The following methods can disable software
support for wireless networking, but note that these methods do not
prevent malicious software or careless users from re-activating the
devices. |
Rule
Deactivate Wireless Network Interfaces
[ref] | Deactivating wireless network interfaces should prevent
normal usage of the wireless capability.
Configure the system to disable all wireless network interfaces with the
following command:
$ sudo nmcli radio wifi off | Rationale: | The use of wireless networking can introduce many different attack vectors into
the organization's network. Common attack vectors such as malicious association
and ad hoc networks will allow an attacker to spoof a wireless access point
(AP), allowing validated systems to connect to the malicious AP and enabling the
attacker to monitor and record network traffic. These malicious APs can also
serve to create a man-in-the-middle attack or be used to create a denial of
service to valid network resources. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_wireless_disable_interfaces | Identifiers and References | References:
3.1.2, 11, 12, 14, 15, 3, 8, 9, APO13.01, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS01.04, DSS05.02, DSS05.03, DSS05.05, DSS06.06, 3.1.16, CCI-000085, CCI-002418, CCI-002421, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 3.1, SR 3.5, SR 3.8, SR 4.1, SR 4.3, SR 5.1, SR 5.2, SR 5.3, SR 7.1, SR 7.6, A.11.2.6, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.13.1.1, A.13.2.1, A.14.1.3, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.6.2.1, A.6.2.2, A.9.1.2, AC-18(a), AC-18(3), CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), MP-7, PR.AC-3, PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, PR.PT-4, SRG-OS-000424-GPOS-00188 | |
|
Group
firewalld
Group contains 2 groups and 2 rules |
[ref]
The dynamic firewall daemon firewalld provides a
dynamically managed firewall with support for network “zones” to assign
a level of trust to a network and its associated connections and interfaces.
It has support for IPv4 and IPv6 firewall settings. It supports Ethernet
bridges and has a separation of runtime and permanent configuration options.
It also has an interface for services or applications to add firewall rules
directly.
A graphical configuration tool, firewall-config , is used to configure
firewalld , which in turn uses iptables tool to communicate
with Netfilter in the kernel which implements packet filtering.
The firewall service provided by firewalld is dynamic rather than
static because changes to the configuration can be made at anytime and are
immediately implemented. There is no need to save or apply the changes. No
unintended disruption of existing network connections occurs as no part of
the firewall has to be reloaded. |
Group
Inspect and Activate Default firewalld Rules
Group contains 1 rule |
[ref]
Firewalls can be used to separate networks into different zones
based on the level of trust the user has decided to place on the devices and
traffic within that network. NetworkManager informs firewalld to which
zone an interface belongs. An interface's assigned zone can be changed by
NetworkManager or via the firewall-config tool.
The zone settings in /etc/firewalld/ are a range of preset settings
which can be quickly applied to a network interface. These are the zones
provided by firewalld sorted according to the default trust level of the
zones from untrusted to trusted:
drop
Any incoming network packets are dropped, there is no
reply. Only outgoing network connections are possible. block
Any incoming network connections are rejected with an
icmp-host-prohibited message for IPv4 and icmp6-adm-prohibited
for IPv6. Only network connections initiated from within the system are
possible. public
For use in public areas. You do not trust the other
computers on the network to not harm your computer. Only selected incoming
connections are accepted. external
For use on external networks with masquerading enabled
especially for routers. You do not trust the other computers on the network to
not harm your computer. Only selected incoming connections are accepted. dmz
For computers in your demilitarized zone that are
publicly-accessible with limited access to your internal network. Only selected
incoming connections are accepted. work
For use in work areas. You mostly trust the other computers
on networks to not harm your computer. Only selected incoming connections are
accepted. home
For use in home areas. You mostly trust the other computers
on networks to not harm your computer. Only selected incoming connections are
accepted. internal
For use on internal networks. You mostly trust the
other computers on the networks to not harm your computer. Only selected
incoming connections are accepted. trusted
All network connections are accepted.
It is possible to designate one of these zones to be the default zone. When
interface connections are added to NetworkManager , they are assigned
to the default zone. On installation, the default zone in firewalld is set to
be the public zone.
To find out all the settings of a zone, for example the public zone,
enter the following command as root:
# firewall-cmd --zone=public --list-all
Example output of this command might look like the following:
# firewall-cmd --zone=public --list-all
public
interfaces:
services: mdns dhcpv6-client ssh
ports:
forward-ports:
icmp-blocks: source-quench
To view the network zones currently active, enter the following command as root:
# firewall-cmd --get-service
The following listing displays the result of this command
on common SUSE Linux Enterprise 15 system:
# firewall-cmd --get-service
amanda-client bacula bacula-client dhcp dhcpv6 dhcpv6-client dns ftp
high-availability http https imaps ipp ipp-client ipsec kerberos kpasswd
ldap ldaps libvirt libvirt-tls mdns mountd ms-wbt mysql nfs ntp openvpn
pmcd pmproxy pmwebapi pmwebapis pop3s postgresql proxy-dhcp radius rpc-bind
samba samba-client smtp ssh telnet tftp tftp-client transmission-client
vnc-server wbem-https
Finally to view the network zones that will be active after the next firewalld
service reload, enter the following command as root:
# firewall-cmd --get-service --permanent |
Rule
Verify firewalld Enabled
[ref] | The firewalld service can be enabled with the following command: $ sudo systemctl enable firewalld.service | Rationale: | Access control methods provide the ability to enhance system security posture
by restricting services and known good IP addresses and address ranges. This
prevents connections from unknown hosts and protocols. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_service_firewalld_enabled | Identifiers and References | References:
3.5.1.4, 11, 3, 9, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, 3.1.3, 3.4.7, CCI-000366, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 7.6, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, AC-4, CM-7(b), CA-3(5), SC-7(21), CM-6(a), PR.IP-1, FMT_MOF_EXT.1, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00231, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00232 | |
|
Group
Strengthen the Default Ruleset
Group contains 1 rule |
[ref]
The default rules can be strengthened. The system
scripts that activate the firewall rules expect them to be defined
in configuration files under the /etc/firewalld/services
and /etc/firewalld/zones directories.
The following recommendations describe how to strengthen the
default ruleset configuration file. An alternative to editing this
configuration file is to create a shell script that makes calls to
the firewall-cmd program to load in rules under the /etc/firewalld/services
and /etc/firewalld/zones directories.
Instructions apply to both unless otherwise noted. Language and address
conventions for regular firewalld rules are used throughout this section. Warning:
The program firewall-config
allows additional services to penetrate the default firewall rules
and automatically adjusts the firewalld ruleset(s). |
Rule
Set Default firewalld Zone for Incoming Packets
[ref] | To set the default zone to drop for
the built-in default zone which processes incoming IPv4 and IPv6 packets,
modify the following line in
/etc/firewalld/firewalld.conf to be:
DefaultZone=drop Warning:
To prevent denying any access to the system, automatic remediation
of this control is not available. Remediation must be automated as
a component of machine provisioning, or followed manually as outlined
above. | Rationale: | In firewalld the default zone is applied only after all
the applicable rules in the table are examined for a match. Setting the
default zone to drop implements proper design for a firewall, i.e.
any packets which are not explicitly permitted should not be
accepted. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_set_firewalld_default_zone | Identifiers and References | References:
3.5.1.5, 11, 14, 3, 9, 5.10.1, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.05, DSS06.06, 3.1.3, 3.4.7, 3.13.6, CCI-000366, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 7.6, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.9.1.2, CA-3(5), CM-7(b), SC-7(23), CM-6(a), PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, FMT_MOF_EXT.1, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, SRG-OS-000480-VMM-002000 | |
|
Group
Uncommon Network Protocols
Group contains 2 rules |
[ref]
The system includes support for several network protocols which are not commonly used.
Although security vulnerabilities in kernel networking code are not frequently discovered,
the consequences can be dramatic. Ensuring uncommon network protocols are disabled
reduces the system's risk to attacks targeted at its implementation of those protocols. Warning:
Although these protocols are not commonly used, avoid disruption
in your network environment by ensuring they are not needed
prior to disabling them. |
Rule
Disable SCTP Support
[ref] | The Stream Control Transmission Protocol (SCTP) is a
transport layer protocol, designed to support the idea of
message-oriented communication, with several streams of messages
within one connection.
To configure the system to prevent the sctp
kernel module from being loaded, add the following line to a file in the directory /etc/modprobe.d :
install sctp /bin/true | Rationale: | Disabling SCTP protects
the system against exploitation of any flaws in its implementation. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_kernel_module_sctp_disabled | Identifiers and References | References:
11, 14, 3, 9, 5.10.1, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.05, DSS06.06, 3.4.6, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 7.6, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.9.1.2, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, SRG-OS-000095-GPOS-00049 | |
|
Rule
Disable DCCP Support
[ref] | The Datagram Congestion Control Protocol (DCCP) is a
relatively new transport layer protocol, designed to support
streaming media and telephony.
To configure the system to prevent the dccp
kernel module from being loaded, add the following line to a file in the directory /etc/modprobe.d :
install dccp /bin/true | Rationale: | Disabling DCCP protects
the system against exploitation of any flaws in its implementation. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_kernel_module_dccp_disabled | Identifiers and References | References:
11, 14, 3, 9, 5.10.1, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.05, DSS06.06, 3.4.6, CCI-001958, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 7.6, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.9.1.2, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, SRG-OS-000096-GPOS-00050, SRG-OS-000378-GPOS-000163 | |
|
Group
Kernel Parameters Which Affect Networking
Group contains 2 groups and 16 rules |
[ref]
The sysctl utility is used to set
parameters which affect the operation of the Linux kernel. Kernel parameters
which affect networking and have security implications are described here. |
Group
Network Related Kernel Runtime Parameters for Hosts and Routers
Group contains 13 rules |
[ref]
Certain kernel parameters should be set for systems which are
acting as either hosts or routers to improve the system's ability defend
against certain types of IPv4 protocol attacks. |
Rule
Enable Kernel Parameter to Ignore ICMP Broadcast Echo Requests on IPv4 Interfaces
[ref] | To set the runtime status of the net.ipv4.icmp_echo_ignore_broadcasts kernel parameter, run the following command: $ sudo sysctl -w net.ipv4.icmp_echo_ignore_broadcasts=1
To make sure that the setting is persistent, add the following line to a file in the directory /etc/sysctl.d : net.ipv4.icmp_echo_ignore_broadcasts = 1 | Rationale: | Responding to broadcast (ICMP) echoes facilitates network mapping
and provides a vector for amplification attacks.
Ignoring ICMP echo requests (pings) sent to broadcast or multicast
addresses makes the system slightly more difficult to enumerate on the network. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sysctl_net_ipv4_icmp_echo_ignore_broadcasts | Identifiers and References | References:
3.3.5, 1, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, 5.10.1.1, APO01.06, APO13.01, BAI04.04, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS01.03, DSS01.05, DSS03.01, DSS03.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, DSS06.06, 3.1.20, CCI-000366, 4.2.3.4, 4.3.3.4, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, 4.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 3.1, SR 3.5, SR 3.8, SR 4.1, SR 4.3, SR 5.1, SR 5.2, SR 5.3, SR 6.2, SR 7.1, SR 7.2, SR 7.6, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.12.1.1, A.12.1.2, A.12.1.3, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.2, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.2, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.17.2.1, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), SC-5, DE.AE-1, DE.CM-1, ID.AM-3, PR.AC-5, PR.DS-4, PR.DS-5, PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, PR.PT-4, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227 | |
|
Rule
Disable Kernel Parameter for Accepting Source-Routed Packets on IPv4 Interfaces by Default
[ref] | To set the runtime status of the net.ipv4.conf.default.accept_source_route kernel parameter, run the following command: $ sudo sysctl -w net.ipv4.conf.default.accept_source_route=0
To make sure that the setting is persistent, add the following line to a file in the directory /etc/sysctl.d : net.ipv4.conf.default.accept_source_route = 0 | Rationale: | Source-routed packets allow the source of the packet to suggest routers
forward the packet along a different path than configured on the router,
which can be used to bypass network security measures.
Accepting source-routed packets in the IPv4 protocol has few legitimate
uses. It should be disabled unless it is absolutely required, such as when
IPv4 forwarding is enabled and the system is legitimately functioning as a
router. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sysctl_net_ipv4_conf_default_accept_source_route | Identifiers and References | References:
NT28(R22), 3.3.1, 1, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, 5.10.1.1, APO01.06, APO13.01, BAI04.04, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS01.03, DSS01.05, DSS03.01, DSS03.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, DSS06.06, 3.1.20, CCI-000366, CCI-001551, 4.2.3.4, 4.3.3.4, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, 4.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 3.1, SR 3.5, SR 3.8, SR 4.1, SR 4.3, SR 5.1, SR 5.2, SR 5.3, SR 6.2, SR 7.1, SR 7.2, SR 7.6, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.12.1.1, A.12.1.2, A.12.1.3, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.2, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.2, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.17.2.1, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), SC-5, SC-7(a), DE.AE-1, DE.CM-1, ID.AM-3, PR.AC-5, PR.DS-4, PR.DS-5, PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, PR.PT-4, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227 | |
|
Rule
Disable Kernel Parameter for Accepting Secure ICMP Redirects on all IPv4 Interfaces
[ref] | To set the runtime status of the net.ipv4.conf.all.secure_redirects kernel parameter, run the following command: $ sudo sysctl -w net.ipv4.conf.all.secure_redirects=0
To make sure that the setting is persistent, add the following line to a file in the directory /etc/sysctl.d : net.ipv4.conf.all.secure_redirects = 0 | Rationale: | Accepting "secure" ICMP redirects (from those gateways listed as
default gateways) has few legitimate uses. It should be disabled unless it is
absolutely required. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sysctl_net_ipv4_conf_all_secure_redirects | Identifiers and References | References:
NT28(R22), 3.3.3, 1, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, APO01.06, APO13.01, BAI04.04, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS01.03, DSS01.05, DSS03.01, DSS03.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, DSS06.06, 3.1.20, CCI-001503, CCI-001551, 4.2.3.4, 4.3.3.4, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, 4.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 3.1, SR 3.5, SR 3.8, SR 4.1, SR 4.3, SR 5.1, SR 5.2, SR 5.3, SR 6.2, SR 7.1, SR 7.2, SR 7.6, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.12.1.1, A.12.1.2, A.12.1.3, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.2, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.2, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.17.2.1, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), SC-7(a), DE.AE-1, DE.CM-1, ID.AM-3, PR.AC-5, PR.DS-4, PR.DS-5, PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, PR.PT-4, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227 | |
|
Rule
Disable Kernel Parameter for Accepting Source-Routed Packets on all IPv4 Interfaces
[ref] | To set the runtime status of the net.ipv4.conf.all.accept_source_route kernel parameter, run the following command: $ sudo sysctl -w net.ipv4.conf.all.accept_source_route=0
To make sure that the setting is persistent, add the following line to a file in the directory /etc/sysctl.d : net.ipv4.conf.all.accept_source_route = 0 | Rationale: | Source-routed packets allow the source of the packet to suggest routers
forward the packet along a different path than configured on the router,
which can be used to bypass network security measures. This requirement
applies only to the forwarding of source-routerd traffic, such as when IPv4
forwarding is enabled and the system is functioning as a router.
Accepting source-routed packets in the IPv4 protocol has few legitimate
uses. It should be disabled unless it is absolutely required. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sysctl_net_ipv4_conf_all_accept_source_route | Identifiers and References | References:
NT28(R22), 3.3.1, 1, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, APO01.06, APO13.01, BAI04.04, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS01.03, DSS01.05, DSS03.01, DSS03.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, DSS06.06, 3.1.20, CCI-000366, 4.2.3.4, 4.3.3.4, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, 4.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 3.1, SR 3.5, SR 3.8, SR 4.1, SR 4.3, SR 5.1, SR 5.2, SR 5.3, SR 6.2, SR 7.1, SR 7.2, SR 7.6, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.12.1.1, A.12.1.2, A.12.1.3, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.2, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.2, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.17.2.1, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), SC-5CM-6(a), SC-7(a), DE.AE-1, DE.CM-1, ID.AM-3, PR.AC-5, PR.DS-4, PR.DS-5, PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, PR.PT-4, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227 | |
|
Rule
Configure Kernel Parameter for Accepting Secure Redirects By Default
[ref] | To set the runtime status of the net.ipv4.conf.default.secure_redirects kernel parameter, run the following command: $ sudo sysctl -w net.ipv4.conf.default.secure_redirects=0
To make sure that the setting is persistent, add the following line to a file in the directory /etc/sysctl.d : net.ipv4.conf.default.secure_redirects = 0 | Rationale: | Accepting "secure" ICMP redirects (from those gateways listed as
default gateways) has few legitimate uses. It should be disabled unless it is
absolutely required. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sysctl_net_ipv4_conf_default_secure_redirects | Identifiers and References | References:
NT28(R22), 3.3.2, 1, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, APO01.06, APO13.01, BAI04.04, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS01.03, DSS01.05, DSS03.01, DSS03.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, DSS06.06, 3.1.20, CCI-001551, 4.2.3.4, 4.3.3.4, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, 4.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 3.1, SR 3.5, SR 3.8, SR 4.1, SR 4.3, SR 5.1, SR 5.2, SR 5.3, SR 6.2, SR 7.1, SR 7.2, SR 7.6, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.12.1.1, A.12.1.2, A.12.1.3, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.2, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.2, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.17.2.1, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), SC-5, SC-7(a), DE.AE-1, DE.CM-1, ID.AM-3, PR.AC-5, PR.DS-4, PR.DS-5, PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, PR.PT-4, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227 | |
|
Rule
Disable Kernel Parameter for Accepting ICMP Redirects by Default on IPv4 Interfaces
[ref] | To set the runtime status of the net.ipv4.conf.default.accept_redirects kernel parameter, run the following command: $ sudo sysctl -w net.ipv4.conf.default.accept_redirects=0
To make sure that the setting is persistent, add the following line to a file in the directory /etc/sysctl.d : net.ipv4.conf.default.accept_redirects = 0 | Rationale: | ICMP redirect messages are used by routers to inform hosts that a more
direct route exists for a particular destination. These messages modify the
host's route table and are unauthenticated. An illicit ICMP redirect
message could result in a man-in-the-middle attack.
This feature of the IPv4 protocol has few legitimate uses. It should
be disabled unless absolutely required. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sysctl_net_ipv4_conf_default_accept_redirects | Identifiers and References | References:
NT28(R22), 3.3.3, 1, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, 5.10.1.1, APO01.06, APO13.01, BAI04.04, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS01.03, DSS01.05, DSS03.01, DSS03.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, DSS06.06, 3.1.20, CCI-000366, CCI-001551, 4.2.3.4, 4.3.3.4, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, 4.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 3.1, SR 3.5, SR 3.8, SR 4.1, SR 4.3, SR 5.1, SR 5.2, SR 5.3, SR 6.2, SR 7.1, SR 7.2, SR 7.6, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.12.1.1, A.12.1.2, A.12.1.3, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.2, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.2, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.17.2.1, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), SC-7(a), DE.AE-1, DE.CM-1, ID.AM-3, PR.AC-5, PR.DS-4, PR.DS-5, PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, PR.PT-4, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227 | |
|
Rule
Enable Kernel Parameter to Use TCP Syncookies on IPv4 Interfaces
[ref] | To set the runtime status of the net.ipv4.tcp_syncookies kernel parameter, run the following command: $ sudo sysctl -w net.ipv4.tcp_syncookies=1
To make sure that the setting is persistent, add the following line to a file in the directory /etc/sysctl.d : net.ipv4.tcp_syncookies = 1 | Rationale: | A TCP SYN flood attack can cause a denial of service by filling a
system's TCP connection table with connections in the SYN_RCVD state.
Syncookies can be used to track a connection when a subsequent ACK is received,
verifying the initiator is attempting a valid connection and is not a flood
source. This feature is activated when a flood condition is detected, and
enables the system to continue servicing valid connection requests. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sysctl_net_ipv4_tcp_syncookies | Identifiers and References | References:
NT28(R22), 3.3.8, 1, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 2, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, 5.10.1.1, APO01.06, APO13.01, BAI04.04, DSS01.03, DSS01.05, DSS03.01, DSS03.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 3.1.20, CCI-000366, 4.2.3.4, 4.3.3.4, 4.4.3.3, SR 3.1, SR 3.5, SR 3.8, SR 4.1, SR 4.3, SR 5.1, SR 5.2, SR 5.3, SR 6.2, SR 7.1, SR 7.2, SR 7.6, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.12.1.1, A.12.1.2, A.12.1.3, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.2, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.2, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.17.2.1, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), SC-5(1), SC-5(2), SC-5(3)(a), CM-6(a), DE.AE-1, DE.CM-1, ID.AM-3, PR.AC-5, PR.DS-4, PR.DS-5, PR.PT-4, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, SRG-OS-000420-GPOS-00186, SRG-OS-000142-GPOS-00071 | |
|
Rule
Enable Kernel Parameter to Ignore Bogus ICMP Error Responses on IPv4 Interfaces
[ref] | To set the runtime status of the net.ipv4.icmp_ignore_bogus_error_responses kernel parameter, run the following command: $ sudo sysctl -w net.ipv4.icmp_ignore_bogus_error_responses=1
To make sure that the setting is persistent, add the following line to a file in the directory /etc/sysctl.d : net.ipv4.icmp_ignore_bogus_error_responses = 1 | Rationale: | Ignoring bogus ICMP error responses reduces
log size, although some activity would not be logged. | Severity: | unknown | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sysctl_net_ipv4_icmp_ignore_bogus_error_responses | Identifiers and References | References:
NT28(R22), 3.3.6, 1, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 2, 3, 7, 8, 9, APO13.01, BAI04.04, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS01.03, DSS03.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS06.06, 3.1.20, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 6.2, SR 7.1, SR 7.2, SR 7.6, A.12.1.2, A.12.1.3, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.17.2.1, A.9.1.2, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), SC-5, DE.CM-1, PR.DS-4, PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227 | |
|
Rule
Disable Accepting ICMP Redirects for All IPv4 Interfaces
[ref] | To set the runtime status of the net.ipv4.conf.all.accept_redirects kernel parameter, run the following command: $ sudo sysctl -w net.ipv4.conf.all.accept_redirects=0
To make sure that the setting is persistent, add the following line to a file in the directory /etc/sysctl.d : net.ipv4.conf.all.accept_redirects = 0 | Rationale: | ICMP redirect messages are used by routers to inform hosts that a more
direct route exists for a particular destination. These messages modify the
host's route table and are unauthenticated. An illicit ICMP redirect
message could result in a man-in-the-middle attack.
This feature of the IPv4 protocol has few legitimate uses. It should be
disabled unless absolutely required." | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sysctl_net_ipv4_conf_all_accept_redirects | Identifiers and References | References:
NT28(R22), 3.3.2, 1, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 2, 3, 7, 8, 9, 5.10.1.1, APO13.01, BAI04.04, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS01.03, DSS03.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS06.06, 3.1.20, CCI-000366, CCI-001503, CCI-001551, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 6.2, SR 7.1, SR 7.2, SR 7.6, A.12.1.2, A.12.1.3, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.17.2.1, A.9.1.2, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), SC-7(a), DE.CM-1, PR.DS-4, PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227 | |
|
Rule
Enable Kernel Parameter to Use Reverse Path Filtering on all IPv4 Interfaces by Default
[ref] | To set the runtime status of the net.ipv4.conf.default.rp_filter kernel parameter, run the following command: $ sudo sysctl -w net.ipv4.conf.default.rp_filter=1
To make sure that the setting is persistent, add the following line to a file in the directory /etc/sysctl.d : net.ipv4.conf.default.rp_filter = 1 | Rationale: | Enabling reverse path filtering drops packets with source addresses
that should not have been able to be received on the interface they were
received on. It should not be used on systems which are routers for
complicated networks, but is helpful for end hosts and routers serving small
networks. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sysctl_net_ipv4_conf_default_rp_filter | Identifiers and References | References:
NT28(R22), 3.3.7, 1, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 2, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, APO01.06, APO13.01, BAI04.04, DSS01.03, DSS01.05, DSS03.01, DSS03.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 3.1.20, CCI-000366, 4.2.3.4, 4.3.3.4, 4.4.3.3, SR 3.1, SR 3.5, SR 3.8, SR 4.1, SR 4.3, SR 5.1, SR 5.2, SR 5.3, SR 6.2, SR 7.1, SR 7.2, SR 7.6, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.12.1.1, A.12.1.2, A.12.1.3, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.2, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.2, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.17.2.1, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), SC-7(a), DE.AE-1, DE.CM-1, ID.AM-3, PR.AC-5, PR.DS-4, PR.DS-5, PR.PT-4, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227 | |
|
Rule
Enable Kernel Parameter to Use Reverse Path Filtering on all IPv4 Interfaces
[ref] | To set the runtime status of the net.ipv4.conf.all.rp_filter kernel parameter, run the following command: $ sudo sysctl -w net.ipv4.conf.all.rp_filter=1
To make sure that the setting is persistent, add the following line to a file in the directory /etc/sysctl.d : net.ipv4.conf.all.rp_filter = 1 | Rationale: | Enabling reverse path filtering drops packets with source addresses
that should not have been able to be received on the interface they were
received on. It should not be used on systems which are routers for
complicated networks, but is helpful for end hosts and routers serving small
networks. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sysctl_net_ipv4_conf_all_rp_filter | Identifiers and References | References:
NT28(R22), 3.3.7, 1, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 2, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, APO01.06, APO13.01, BAI04.04, DSS01.03, DSS01.05, DSS03.01, DSS03.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 3.1.20, CCI-000366, CCI-001551, 4.2.3.4, 4.3.3.4, 4.4.3.3, SR 3.1, SR 3.5, SR 3.8, SR 4.1, SR 4.3, SR 5.1, SR 5.2, SR 5.3, SR 6.2, SR 7.1, SR 7.2, SR 7.6, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.12.1.1, A.12.1.2, A.12.1.3, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.2, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.2, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.17.2.1, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), SC-7(a), DE.AE-1, DE.CM-1, ID.AM-3, PR.AC-5, PR.DS-4, PR.DS-5, PR.PT-4, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227 | |
|
Rule
Enable Kernel Parameter to Log Martian Packets on all IPv4 Interfaces
[ref] | To set the runtime status of the net.ipv4.conf.all.log_martians kernel parameter, run the following command: $ sudo sysctl -w net.ipv4.conf.all.log_martians=1
To make sure that the setting is persistent, add the following line to a file in the directory /etc/sysctl.d : net.ipv4.conf.all.log_martians = 1 | Rationale: | The presence of "martian" packets (which have impossible addresses)
as well as spoofed packets, source-routed packets, and redirects could be a
sign of nefarious network activity. Logging these packets enables this activity
to be detected. | Severity: | unknown | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sysctl_net_ipv4_conf_all_log_martians | Identifiers and References | References:
NT28(R22), 3.3.4, 1, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 2, 3, 7, 8, 9, APO13.01, BAI04.04, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS01.03, DSS01.04, DSS03.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.03, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS06.06, 3.1.20, CCI-000126, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 3.1, SR 3.5, SR 3.8, SR 4.1, SR 4.3, SR 5.1, SR 5.2, SR 5.3, SR 6.2, SR 7.1, SR 7.2, SR 7.6, A.11.2.6, A.12.1.2, A.12.1.3, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.13.1.1, A.13.2.1, A.14.1.3, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.17.2.1, A.6.2.1, A.6.2.2, A.9.1.2, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), SC-5(3)(a), DE.CM-1, PR.AC-3, PR.DS-4, PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, PR.PT-4, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227 | |
|
Rule
Enable Kernel Paremeter to Log Martian Packets on all IPv4 Interfaces by Default
[ref] | To set the runtime status of the net.ipv4.conf.default.log_martians kernel parameter, run the following command: $ sudo sysctl -w net.ipv4.conf.default.log_martians=1
To make sure that the setting is persistent, add the following line to a file in the directory /etc/sysctl.d : net.ipv4.conf.default.log_martians = 1 | Rationale: | The presence of "martian" packets (which have impossible addresses)
as well as spoofed packets, source-routed packets, and redirects could be a
sign of nefarious network activity. Logging these packets enables this activity
to be detected. | Severity: | unknown | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sysctl_net_ipv4_conf_default_log_martians | Identifiers and References | References:
3.3.4, 1, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 2, 3, 7, 8, 9, APO13.01, BAI04.04, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS01.03, DSS01.04, DSS03.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.03, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS06.06, 3.1.20, CCI-000126, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 3.1, SR 3.5, SR 3.8, SR 4.1, SR 4.3, SR 5.1, SR 5.2, SR 5.3, SR 6.2, SR 7.1, SR 7.2, SR 7.6, A.11.2.6, A.12.1.2, A.12.1.3, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.13.1.1, A.13.2.1, A.14.1.3, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.17.2.1, A.6.2.1, A.6.2.2, A.9.1.2, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), SC-5(3)(a), DE.CM-1, PR.AC-3, PR.DS-4, PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, PR.PT-4, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227 | |
|
Group
Network Parameters for Hosts Only
Group contains 3 rules |
[ref]
If the system is not going to be used as a router, then setting certain
kernel parameters ensure that the host will not perform routing
of network traffic. |
Rule
Disable Kernel Parameter for Sending ICMP Redirects on all IPv4 Interfaces by Default
[ref] | To set the runtime status of the net.ipv4.conf.default.send_redirects kernel parameter, run the following command: $ sudo sysctl -w net.ipv4.conf.default.send_redirects=0
To make sure that the setting is persistent, add the following line to a file in the directory /etc/sysctl.d : net.ipv4.conf.default.send_redirects = 0 | Rationale: | ICMP redirect messages are used by routers to inform hosts that a more
direct route exists for a particular destination. These messages contain information
from the system's route table possibly revealing portions of the network topology.
The ability to send ICMP redirects is only appropriate for systems acting as routers. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sysctl_net_ipv4_conf_default_send_redirects | Identifiers and References | References:
NT28(R22), 3.2.2, 1, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, 5.10.1.1, APO01.06, APO13.01, BAI04.04, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS01.03, DSS01.05, DSS03.01, DSS03.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, DSS06.06, 3.1.20, CCI-000366, 4.2.3.4, 4.3.3.4, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, 4.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 3.1, SR 3.5, SR 3.8, SR 4.1, SR 4.3, SR 5.1, SR 5.2, SR 5.3, SR 6.2, SR 7.1, SR 7.2, SR 7.6, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.12.1.1, A.12.1.2, A.12.1.3, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.2, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.2, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.17.2.1, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), SC-5CM-6(a), SC-7(a), DE.AE-1, DE.CM-1, ID.AM-3, PR.AC-5, PR.DS-4, PR.DS-5, PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, PR.PT-4, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227 | |
|
Rule
Disable Kernel Parameter for IP Forwarding on IPv4 Interfaces
[ref] | To set the runtime status of the net.ipv4.ip_forward kernel parameter, run the following command: $ sudo sysctl -w net.ipv4.ip_forward=0
To make sure that the setting is persistent, add the following line to a file in the directory /etc/sysctl.d : net.ipv4.ip_forward = 0 Warning:
Certain technologies such as virtual machines, containers, etc. rely on IPv4 forwarding to enable and use networking.
Disabling IPv4 forwarding would cause those technologies to stop working. Therefore, this rule should not be used in
profiles or benchmarks that target usage of IPv4 forwarding. | Rationale: | Routing protocol daemons are typically used on routers to exchange
network topology information with other routers. If this capability is used when
not required, system network information may be unnecessarily transmitted across
the network. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sysctl_net_ipv4_ip_forward | Identifiers and References | References:
NT28(R22), 3.2.1, 1, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 2, 3, 7, 8, 9, APO13.01, BAI04.04, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS01.03, DSS03.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS06.06, 3.1.20, CCI-000366, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 3.1, SR 3.5, SR 3.8, SR 4.1, SR 4.3, SR 5.1, SR 5.2, SR 5.3, SR 6.2, SR 7.1, SR 7.2, SR 7.6, A.12.1.2, A.12.1.3, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.13.1.1, A.13.2.1, A.14.1.3, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.17.2.1, A.9.1.2, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), SC-5CM-6(a), SC-7(a), DE.CM-1, PR.DS-4, PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, PR.PT-4, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227 | |
|
Rule
Disable Kernel Parameter for Sending ICMP Redirects on all IPv4 Interfaces
[ref] | To set the runtime status of the net.ipv4.conf.all.send_redirects kernel parameter, run the following command: $ sudo sysctl -w net.ipv4.conf.all.send_redirects=0
To make sure that the setting is persistent, add the following line to a file in the directory /etc/sysctl.d : net.ipv4.conf.all.send_redirects = 0 | Rationale: | ICMP redirect messages are used by routers to inform hosts that a more
direct route exists for a particular destination. These messages contain information
from the system's route table possibly revealing portions of the network topology.
The ability to send ICMP redirects is only appropriate for systems acting as routers. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sysctl_net_ipv4_conf_all_send_redirects | Identifiers and References | References:
NT28(R22), 3.2.2, 1, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, 5.10.1.1, APO01.06, APO13.01, BAI04.04, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS01.03, DSS01.05, DSS03.01, DSS03.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, DSS06.06, 3.1.20, CCI-000366, 4.2.3.4, 4.3.3.4, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, 4.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 3.1, SR 3.5, SR 3.8, SR 4.1, SR 4.3, SR 5.1, SR 5.2, SR 5.3, SR 6.2, SR 7.1, SR 7.2, SR 7.6, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.12.1.1, A.12.1.2, A.12.1.3, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.2, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.2, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.17.2.1, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), SC-5CM-6(a), SC-7(a), DE.AE-1, DE.CM-1, ID.AM-3, PR.AC-5, PR.DS-4, PR.DS-5, PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, PR.PT-4, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227 | |
|
Group
iptables and ip6tables
Group contains 2 groups and 5 rules |
[ref]
A host-based firewall called netfilter is included as
part of the Linux kernel distributed with the system. It is
activated by default. This firewall is controlled by the program
iptables , and the entire capability is frequently referred to by
this name. An analogous program called ip6tables handles filtering
for IPv6.
Unlike TCP Wrappers, which depends on the network server
program to support and respect the rules written, netfilter
filtering occurs at the kernel level, before a program can even
process the data from the network packet. As such, any program on
the system is affected by the rules written.
This section provides basic information about strengthening
the iptables and ip6tables configurations included with the system.
For more complete information that may allow the construction of a
sophisticated ruleset tailored to your environment, please consult
the references at the end of this section. |
Group
Strengthen the Default Ruleset
Group contains 1 rule |
[ref]
The default rules can be strengthened. The system
scripts that activate the firewall rules expect them to be defined
in the configuration files iptables and ip6tables in the directory
/etc/sysconfig . Many of the lines in these files are similar
to the command line arguments that would be provided to the programs
/sbin/iptables or /sbin/ip6tables - but some are quite
different.
The following recommendations describe how to strengthen the
default ruleset configuration file. An alternative to editing this
configuration file is to create a shell script that makes calls to
the iptables program to load in rules, and then invokes service
iptables save to write those loaded rules to
/etc/sysconfig/iptables.
The following alterations can be made directly to
/etc/sysconfig/iptables and /etc/sysconfig/ip6tables .
Instructions apply to both unless otherwise noted. Language and address
conventions for regular iptables are used throughout this section;
configuration for ip6tables will be either analogous or explicitly
covered. Warning:
The program system-config-securitylevel
allows additional services to penetrate the default firewall rules
and automatically adjusts /etc/sysconfig/iptables . This program
is only useful if the default ruleset meets your security
requirements. Otherwise, this program should not be used to make
changes to the firewall configuration because it re-writes the
saved configuration file. |
Rule
Set Default iptables Policy for Incoming Packets
[ref] | To set the default policy to DROP (instead of ACCEPT) for
the built-in INPUT chain which processes incoming packets,
add or correct the following line in
/etc/sysconfig/iptables :
:INPUT DROP [0:0] | Rationale: | In iptables the default policy is applied only after all
the applicable rules in the table are examined for a match. Setting the
default policy to DROP implements proper design for a firewall, i.e.
any packets which are not explicitly permitted should not be
accepted. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_set_iptables_default_rule | Identifiers and References | References:
11, 14, 3, 9, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.05, DSS06.06, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 7.6, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.9.1.2, CA-3(5), CM-7(b), SC-7(23), CM-6(a), PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3 | |
|
Group
Inspect and Activate Default Rules
Group contains 3 rules |
[ref]
View the currently-enforced iptables rules by running
the command:
$ sudo iptables -nL --line-numbers
The command is analogous for ip6tables .
If the firewall does not appear to be active (i.e., no rules
appear), activate it and ensure that it starts at boot by issuing
the following commands (and analogously for ip6tables ):
$ sudo service iptables restart
The default iptables rules are:
Chain INPUT (policy ACCEPT)
num target prot opt source destination
1 ACCEPT all -- 0.0.0.0/0 0.0.0.0/0 state RELATED,ESTABLISHED
2 ACCEPT icmp -- 0.0.0.0/0 0.0.0.0/0
3 ACCEPT all -- 0.0.0.0/0 0.0.0.0/0
4 ACCEPT tcp -- 0.0.0.0/0 0.0.0.0/0 state NEW tcp dpt:22
5 REJECT all -- 0.0.0.0/0 0.0.0.0/0 reject-with icmp-host-prohibited
Chain FORWARD (policy ACCEPT)
num target prot opt source destination
1 REJECT all -- 0.0.0.0/0 0.0.0.0/0 reject-with icmp-host-prohibited
Chain OUTPUT (policy ACCEPT)
num target prot opt source destination
The ip6tables default rules are essentially the same. |
Rule
Verify iptables Enabled
[ref] | The iptables service can be enabled with the following command: $ sudo systemctl enable iptables.service | Rationale: | The iptables service provides the system's host-based firewalling
capability for IPv4 and ICMP. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_service_iptables_enabled | Identifiers and References | References:
1, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 4, 6, 8, 9, APO01.06, APO13.01, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS01.05, DSS03.01, DSS05.02, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, DSS06.06, 4.2.3.4, 4.3.3.4, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, 4.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 3.1, SR 3.5, SR 3.8, SR 4.1, SR 4.3, SR 5.1, SR 5.2, SR 5.3, SR 7.1, SR 7.6, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.12.1.1, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.2, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.2, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, AC-4, CM-7(b), CA-3(5), SC-7(21), CM-6(a), DE.AE-1, ID.AM-3, PR.AC-5, PR.DS-5, PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, PR.PT-4 | |
|
Rule
Verify ip6tables Enabled if Using IPv6
[ref] | The ip6tables service can be enabled with the following command: $ sudo systemctl enable ip6tables.service | Rationale: | The ip6tables service provides the system's host-based firewalling
capability for IPv6 and ICMPv6. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_service_ip6tables_enabled | Identifiers and References | References:
1, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 4, 6, 8, 9, APO01.06, APO13.01, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS01.05, DSS03.01, DSS05.02, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, DSS06.06, 4.2.3.4, 4.3.3.4, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, 4.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 3.1, SR 3.5, SR 3.8, SR 4.1, SR 4.3, SR 5.1, SR 5.2, SR 5.3, SR 7.1, SR 7.6, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.12.1.1, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.2, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.2, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, AC-4, CM-7(b), CA-3(5), SC-7(21), CM-6(a), DE.AE-1, ID.AM-3, PR.AC-5, PR.DS-5, PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, PR.PT-4 | |
|
Rule
Set Default ip6tables Policy for Incoming Packets
[ref] | To set the default policy to DROP (instead of ACCEPT) for
the built-in INPUT chain which processes incoming packets,
add or correct the following line in
/etc/sysconfig/ip6tables :
:INPUT DROP [0:0]
If changes were required, reload the ip6tables rules:
$ sudo service ip6tables reload | Rationale: | In ip6tables , the default policy is applied only after all
the applicable rules in the table are examined for a match. Setting the
default policy to DROP implements proper design for a firewall, i.e.
any packets which are not explicitly permitted should not be
accepted. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_set_ip6tables_default_rule | Identifiers and References | References:
11, 14, 3, 9, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.05, DSS06.06, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 7.6, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.9.1.2, AC-4, CM-7(b), CA-3(5), SC-7(21), CM-6(a), PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3 | |
|
Rule
Install iptables Package
[ref] | The iptables package can be installed with the following command:
$ sudo zypper install iptables | Rationale: | iptables controls the Linux kernel network packet filtering
code. iptables allows system operators to set up firewalls and IP
masquerading, etc.
| Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_package_iptables_installed | Identifiers and References | References:
CM-6(a), SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227 | |
|
Group
IPv6
Group contains 2 groups and 3 rules |
[ref]
The system includes support for Internet Protocol
version 6. A major and often-mentioned improvement over IPv4 is its
enormous increase in the number of available addresses. Another
important feature is its support for automatic configuration of
many network settings. |
Group
Disable Support for IPv6 Unless Needed
Group contains 1 rule |
[ref]
Despite configuration that suggests support for IPv6 has
been disabled, link-local IPv6 address auto-configuration occurs
even when only an IPv4 address is assigned. The only way to
effectively prevent execution of the IPv6 networking stack is to
instruct the system not to activate the IPv6 kernel module. |
Rule
Ensure IPv6 is disabled through kernel boot parameter
[ref] | To disable IPv6 protocol support in the Linux kernel,
add the argument ipv6.disable=1 to the default
GRUB2 command line for the Linux operating system in
/boot/grub2/grubenv , in the manner below:
sudo grub2-editenv - set "$(grub2-editenv - list | grep kernelopts) ipv6.disable=1" Warning:
The GRUB 2 configuration file, grub.cfg ,
is automatically updated each time a new kernel is installed. Note that any
changes to /etc/default/grub require rebuilding the grub.cfg
file. To update the GRUB 2 configuration file manually, use the
grub2-mkconfig -o command as follows:
| Rationale: | Any unnecessary network stacks, including IPv6, should be disabled to reduce
the vulnerability to exploitation. | Severity: | low | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_grub2_ipv6_disable_argument | Identifiers and References | References:
3.1.1 | |
|
Group
Configure IPv6 Settings if Necessary
Group contains 2 rules |
[ref]
A major feature of IPv6 is the extent to which systems
implementing it can automatically configure their networking
devices using information from the network. From a security
perspective, manually configuring important configuration
information is preferable to accepting it from the network
in an unauthenticated fashion. |
Rule
Disable Accepting Router Advertisements on all IPv6 Interfaces by Default
[ref] | To set the runtime status of the net.ipv6.conf.default.accept_ra kernel parameter, run the following command: $ sudo sysctl -w net.ipv6.conf.default.accept_ra=0
To make sure that the setting is persistent, add the following line to a file in the directory /etc/sysctl.d : net.ipv6.conf.default.accept_ra = 0 | Rationale: | An illicit router advertisement message could result in a man-in-the-middle attack. | Severity: | unknown | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sysctl_net_ipv6_conf_default_accept_ra | Identifiers and References | References:
3.3.9, 11, 14, 3, 9, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.05, DSS06.06, 3.1.20, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 7.6, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.9.1.2, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227 | |
|
Rule
Configure Accepting Router Advertisements on All IPv6 Interfaces
[ref] | To set the runtime status of the net.ipv6.conf.all.accept_ra kernel parameter, run the following command: $ sudo sysctl -w net.ipv6.conf.all.accept_ra=0
To make sure that the setting is persistent, add the following line to a file in the directory /etc/sysctl.d : net.ipv6.conf.all.accept_ra = 0 | Rationale: | An illicit router advertisement message could result in a man-in-the-middle attack. | Severity: | unknown | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sysctl_net_ipv6_conf_all_accept_ra | Identifiers and References | References:
3.3.9, 11, 14, 3, 9, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.05, DSS06.06, 3.1.20, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 7.6, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.9.1.2, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227 | |
|
Group
Configure Syslog
Group contains 3 groups and 7 rules |
[ref]
The syslog service has been the default Unix logging mechanism for
many years. It has a number of downsides, including inconsistent log format,
lack of authentication for received messages, and lack of authentication,
encryption, or reliable transport for messages sent over a network. However,
due to its long history, syslog is a de facto standard which is supported by
almost all Unix applications.
In SUSE Linux Enterprise 15, rsyslog has replaced ksyslogd as the
syslog daemon of choice, and it includes some additional security features
such as reliable, connection-oriented (i.e. TCP) transmission of logs, the
option to log to database formats, and the encryption of log data en route to
a central logging server.
This section discusses how to configure rsyslog for
best effect, and how to use tools provided with the system to maintain and
monitor logs. |
Group
Ensure Proper Configuration of Log Files
Group contains 3 rules |
[ref]
The file /etc/rsyslog.conf controls where log message are written.
These are controlled by lines called rules, which consist of a
selector and an action.
These rules are often customized depending on the role of the system, the
requirements of the environment, and whatever may enable
the administrator to most effectively make use of log data.
The default rules in SUSE Linux Enterprise 15 are:
*.info;mail.none;authpriv.none;cron.none /var/log/messages
authpriv.* /var/log/secure
mail.* -/var/log/maillog
cron.* /var/log/cron
*.emerg *
uucp,news.crit /var/log/spooler
local7.* /var/log/boot.log
See the man page rsyslog.conf(5) for more information.
Note that the rsyslog daemon can be configured to use a timestamp format that
some log processing programs may not understand. If this occurs,
edit the file /etc/rsyslog.conf and add or edit the following line:
$ ActionFileDefaultTemplate RSYSLOG_TraditionalFileFormat |
Rule
Ensure Log Files Are Owned By Appropriate Group
[ref] | The group-owner of all log files written by
rsyslog should be root .
These log files are determined by the second part of each Rule line in
/etc/rsyslog.conf and typically all appear in /var/log .
For each log file LOGFILE referenced in /etc/rsyslog.conf ,
run the following command to inspect the file's group owner:
$ ls -l LOGFILE
If the owner is not root , run the following command to
correct this:
$ sudo chgrp root LOGFILE | Rationale: | The log files generated by rsyslog contain valuable information regarding system
configuration, user authentication, and other such information. Log files should be
protected from unauthorized access. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_rsyslog_files_groupownership | Identifiers and References | References:
NT28(R46), NT28(R5), 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, CCI-001314, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, Req-10.5.1, Req-10.5.2 | |
|
Rule
Ensure Log Files Are Owned By Appropriate User
[ref] | The owner of all log files written by
rsyslog should be root .
These log files are determined by the second part of each Rule line in
/etc/rsyslog.conf and typically all appear in /var/log .
For each log file LOGFILE referenced in /etc/rsyslog.conf ,
run the following command to inspect the file's owner:
$ ls -l LOGFILE
If the owner is not root , run the following command to
correct this:
$ sudo chown root LOGFILE | Rationale: | The log files generated by rsyslog contain valuable information regarding system
configuration, user authentication, and other such information. Log files should be
protected from unauthorized access. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_rsyslog_files_ownership | Identifiers and References | References:
NT28(R46), NT28(R5), 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, CCI-001314, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, Req-10.5.1, Req-10.5.2 | |
|
Rule
Ensure System Log Files Have Correct Permissions
[ref] | The file permissions for all log files written by rsyslog should
be set to 600, or more restrictive. These log files are determined by the
second part of each Rule line in /etc/rsyslog.conf and typically
all appear in /var/log . For each log file LOGFILE
referenced in /etc/rsyslog.conf , run the following command to
inspect the file's permissions:
$ ls -l LOGFILE
If the permissions are not 600 or more restrictive, run the following
command to correct this:
$ sudo chmod 0600 LOGFILE " | Rationale: | Log files can contain valuable information regarding system
configuration. If the system log files are not protected unauthorized
users could change the logged data, eliminating their forensic value. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_rsyslog_files_permissions | Identifiers and References | References:
NT28(R36), CCI-001314, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), Req-10.5.1, Req-10.5.2 | |
|
Group
Ensure All Logs are Rotated by logrotate
Group contains 1 rule |
[ref]
Edit the file /etc/logrotate.d/syslog . Find the first
line, which should look like this (wrapped for clarity):
/var/log/messages /var/log/secure /var/log/maillog /var/log/spooler \
/var/log/boot.log /var/log/cron {
Edit this line so that it contains a one-space-separated
listing of each log file referenced in /etc/rsyslog.conf .
All logs in use on a system must be rotated regularly, or the
log files will consume disk space over time, eventually interfering
with system operation. The file /etc/logrotate.d/syslog is the
configuration file used by the logrotate program to maintain all
log files written by syslog . By default, it rotates logs weekly and
stores four archival copies of each log. These settings can be
modified by editing /etc/logrotate.conf , but the defaults are
sufficient for purposes of this guide.
Note that logrotate is run nightly by the cron job
/etc/cron.daily/logrotate . If particularly active logs need to be
rotated more often than once a day, some other mechanism must be
used. |
Rule
Ensure Logrotate Runs Periodically
[ref] | The logrotate utility allows for the automatic rotation of
log files. The frequency of rotation is specified in /etc/logrotate.conf ,
which triggers a cron task. To configure logrotate to run daily, add or correct
the following line in /etc/logrotate.conf :
# rotate log files frequency
daily | Rationale: | Log files that are not properly rotated run the risk of growing so large
that they fill up the /var/log partition. Valuable logging information could be lost
if the /var/log partition becomes full. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_ensure_logrotate_activated | Identifiers and References | References:
NT28(R43), NT12(R18), 1, 14, 15, 16, 3, 5, 6, APO11.04, BAI03.05, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, MEA02.01, CCI-000366, 4.3.3.3.9, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.4.4.7, 4.4.2.1, 4.4.2.2, 4.4.2.4, SR 2.10, SR 2.11, SR 2.12, SR 2.8, SR 2.9, A.12.4.1, A.12.4.2, A.12.4.3, A.12.4.4, A.12.7.1, CM-6(a), PR.PT-1, Req-10.7 | |
|
Group
Rsyslog Logs Sent To Remote Host
Group contains 1 rule |
[ref]
If system logs are to be useful in detecting malicious
activities, it is necessary to send logs to a remote server. An
intruder who has compromised the root account on a system may
delete the log entries which indicate that the system was attacked
before they are seen by an administrator.
However, it is recommended that logs be stored on the local
host in addition to being sent to the loghost, especially if
rsyslog has been configured to use the UDP protocol to send
messages over a network. UDP does not guarantee reliable delivery,
and moderately busy sites will lose log messages occasionally,
especially in periods of high traffic which may be the result of an
attack. In addition, remote rsyslog messages are not
authenticated in any way by default, so it is easy for an attacker to
introduce spurious messages to the central log server. Also, some
problems cause loss of network connectivity, which will prevent the
sending of messages to the central server. For all of these reasons, it is
better to store log messages both centrally and on each host, so
that they can be correlated if necessary. |
Rule
Ensure Logs Sent To Remote Host
[ref] | To configure rsyslog to send logs to a remote log server,
open /etc/rsyslog.conf and read and understand the last section of the file,
which describes the multiple directives necessary to activate remote
logging.
Along with these other directives, the system can be configured
to forward its logs to a particular log server by
adding or correcting one of the following lines,
substituting logcollector appropriately.
The choice of protocol depends on the environment of the system;
although TCP and RELP provide more reliable message delivery,
they may not be supported in all environments.
To use UDP for log message delivery:
*.* @logcollector
To use TCP for log message delivery:
*.* @@logcollector
To use RELP for log message delivery:
*.* :omrelp:logcollector
There must be a resolvable DNS CNAME or Alias record set to " logcollector" for logs to be sent correctly to the centralized logging utility. | Rationale: | A log server (loghost) receives syslog messages from one or more
systems. This data can be used as an additional log source in the event a
system is compromised and its local logs are suspect. Forwarding log messages
to a remote loghost also provides system administrators with a centralized
place to view the status of multiple hosts within the enterprise. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_rsyslog_remote_loghost | Identifiers and References | References:
NT28(R7), NT28(R43), NT12(R5), 1, 13, 14, 15, 16, 2, 3, 5, 6, APO11.04, APO13.01, BAI03.05, BAI04.04, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, MEA02.01, CCI-000366, CCI-001348, CCI-000136, CCI-001851, 164.308(a)(1)(ii)(D), 164.308(a)(5)(ii)(B), 164.308(a)(5)(ii)(C), 164.308(a)(6)(ii), 164.308(a)(8), 164.310(d)(2)(iii), 164.312(b), 164.314(a)(2)(i)(C), 164.314(a)(2)(iii), 4.3.3.3.9, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.4.4.7, 4.4.2.1, 4.4.2.2, 4.4.2.4, SR 2.10, SR 2.11, SR 2.12, SR 2.8, SR 2.9, SR 7.1, SR 7.2, A.12.1.3, A.12.4.1, A.12.4.2, A.12.4.3, A.12.4.4, A.12.7.1, A.17.2.1, CM-6(a), AU-4(1), AU-9(2), PR.DS-4, PR.PT-1, FAU_GEN.1.1.c, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, SRG-OS-000032-VMM-000130 | |
|
Rule
Ensure rsyslog is Installed
[ref] | Rsyslog is installed by default. The rsyslog package can be installed with the following command: $ sudo zypper install rsyslog | Rationale: | The rsyslog package provides the rsyslog daemon, which provides
system logging services. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_package_rsyslog_installed | Identifiers and References | References:
NT28(R5), NT28(R46), 1, 14, 15, 16, 3, 5, 6, APO11.04, BAI03.05, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, MEA02.01, CCI-001311, CCI-001312, 164.312(a)(2)(ii), 4.3.3.3.9, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.4.4.7, 4.4.2.1, 4.4.2.2, 4.4.2.4, SR 2.10, SR 2.11, SR 2.12, SR 2.8, SR 2.9, A.12.4.1, A.12.4.2, A.12.4.3, A.12.4.4, A.12.7.1, CM-6(a), PR.PT-1, SRG-OS-000479-GPOS-00224, SRG-OS-000051-GPOS-00024 | |
|
Rule
Enable rsyslog Service
[ref] | The rsyslog service provides syslog-style logging by default on SUSE Linux Enterprise 15.
The rsyslog service can be enabled with the following command:
$ sudo systemctl enable rsyslog.service | Rationale: | The rsyslog service must be running in order to provide
logging services, which are essential to system administration. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_service_rsyslog_enabled | Identifiers and References | References:
NT28(R5), NT28(R46), 1, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, APO10.01, APO10.03, APO10.04, APO10.05, APO11.04, APO13.01, BAI03.05, BAI04.04, DSS01.03, DSS03.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, MEA01.01, MEA01.02, MEA01.03, MEA01.04, MEA01.05, MEA02.01, CCI-001311, CCI-001312, CCI-001557, CCI-001851, 164.312(a)(2)(ii), 4.3.2.6.7, 4.3.3.3.9, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.4.4.7, 4.4.2.1, 4.4.2.2, 4.4.2.4, SR 2.10, SR 2.11, SR 2.12, SR 2.8, SR 2.9, SR 6.1, SR 6.2, SR 7.1, SR 7.2, A.12.1.3, A.12.4.1, A.12.4.2, A.12.4.3, A.12.4.4, A.12.7.1, A.14.2.7, A.15.2.1, A.15.2.2, A.17.2.1, CM-6(a), AU-4(1), DE.CM-1, DE.CM-3, DE.CM-7, ID.SC-4, PR.DS-4, PR.PT-1 | |
|
Group
Services
Group contains 42 groups and 65 rules |
[ref]
The best protection against vulnerable software is running less software. This section describes how to review
the software which SUSE Linux Enterprise 15 installs on a system and disable software which is not needed. It
then enumerates the software packages installed on a default SUSE Linux Enterprise 15 system and provides guidance about which
ones can be safely disabled.
SUSE Linux Enterprise 15 provides a convenient minimal install option that essentially installs the bare necessities for a functional
system. When building SUSE Linux Enterprise 15 systems, it is highly recommended to select the minimal packages and then build up
the system from there. |
Group
Mail Server Software
Group contains 1 group and 1 rule |
[ref]
Mail servers are used to send and receive email over the network.
Mail is a very common service, and Mail Transfer Agents (MTAs) are obvious
targets of network attack.
Ensure that systems are not running MTAs unnecessarily,
and configure needed MTAs as defensively as possible.
Very few systems at any site should be configured to directly receive email over the
network. Users should instead use mail client programs to retrieve email
from a central server that supports protocols such as IMAP or POP3.
However, it is normal for most systems to be independently capable of sending email,
for instance so that cron jobs can report output to an administrator.
Most MTAs, including Postfix, support a submission-only mode in which mail can be sent from
the local system to a central site MTA (or directly delivered to a local account),
but the system still cannot receive mail directly over a network.
The alternatives program in SUSE Linux Enterprise 15 permits selection of other mail server software
(such as Sendmail), but Postfix is the default and is preferred.
Postfix was coded with security in mind and can also be more effectively contained by
SELinux as its modular design has resulted in separate processes performing specific actions.
More information is available on its website,
http://www.postfix.org. |
Group
Configure SMTP For Mail Clients
Group contains 1 rule |
[ref]
This section discusses settings for Postfix in a submission-only
e-mail configuration. |
Rule
Disable Postfix Network Listening
[ref] | Edit the file /etc/postfix/main.cf to ensure that only the following
inet_interfaces line appears:
inet_interfaces = loopback-only | Rationale: | This ensures postfix accepts mail messages
(such as cron job reports) from the local system only,
and not from the network, which protects it from network attack. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_postfix_network_listening_disabled | Identifiers and References | References:
2.2.15, 11, 14, 3, 9, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.05, DSS06.06, CCI-000382, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 7.6, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.9.1.2, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3 | |
|
Group
Samba(SMB) Microsoft Windows File Sharing Server
Group contains 1 group and 1 rule |
[ref]
When properly configured, the Samba service allows
Linux systems to provide file and print sharing to Microsoft
Windows systems. There are two software packages that provide
Samba support. The first, samba-client , provides a series of
command line tools that enable a client system to access Samba
shares. The second, simply labeled samba , provides the Samba
service. It is this second package that allows a Linux system to
act as an Active Directory server, a domain controller, or as a
domain member. Only the samba-client package is installed by
default. |
Group
Disable Samba if Possible
Group contains 1 rule |
[ref]
Even after the Samba server package has been installed, it
will remain disabled. Do not enable this service unless it is
absolutely necessary to provide Microsoft Windows file and print
sharing functionality. |
Rule
Disable Samba
[ref] | The smb service can be disabled with the following command: $ sudo systemctl disable smb.service The smb service can be masked with the following command: $ sudo systemctl mask smb.service | Rationale: | Running a Samba server provides a network-based avenue of attack, and
should be disabled if not needed. | Severity: | low | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_service_smb_disabled | Identifiers and References | References:
2.2.12, CCI-001436 | |
|
Group
DHCP
Group contains 1 group and 1 rule |
[ref]
The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) allows
systems to request and obtain an IP address and other configuration
parameters from a server.
This guide recommends configuring networking on clients by manually editing
the appropriate files under /etc/sysconfig . Use of DHCP can make client
systems vulnerable to compromise by rogue DHCP servers, and should be avoided
unless necessary. If using DHCP is necessary, however, there are best practices
that should be followed to minimize security risk. |
Group
Disable DHCP Server
Group contains 1 rule |
[ref]
The DHCP server dhcpd is not installed or activated by
default. If the software was installed and activated, but the
system does not need to act as a DHCP server, it should be disabled
and removed. |
Rule
Disable DHCP Service
[ref] | The dhcpd service should be disabled on
any system that does not need to act as a DHCP server.
The dhcpd service can be disabled with the following command:
$ sudo systemctl disable dhcpd.service
The dhcpd service can be masked with the following command:
$ sudo systemctl mask dhcpd.service | Rationale: | Unmanaged or unintentionally activated DHCP servers may provide faulty information
to clients, interfering with the operation of a legitimate site
DHCP server if there is one. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_service_dhcpd_disabled | Identifiers and References | References:
2.2.5, 11, 14, 3, 9, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.05, DSS06.06, CCI-000366, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 7.6, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.9.1.2, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3 | |
|
Group
SSH Server
Group contains 1 group and 18 rules |
[ref]
The SSH protocol is recommended for remote login and
remote file transfer. SSH provides confidentiality and integrity
for data exchanged between two systems, as well as server
authentication, through the use of public key cryptography. The
implementation included with the system is called OpenSSH, and more
detailed documentation is available from its website,
https://www.openssh.com.
Its server program is called sshd and provided by the RPM package
openssh-server . |
Group
Configure OpenSSH Server if Necessary
Group contains 13 rules |
[ref]
If the system needs to act as an SSH server, then
certain changes should be made to the OpenSSH daemon configuration
file /etc/ssh/sshd_config . The following recommendations can be
applied to this file. See the sshd_config(5) man page for more
detailed information. |
Rule
Set LogLevel to INFO
[ref] | The INFO parameter specifices that record login and logout activity will be logged.
To specify the log level in
SSH, add or correct the following line in the /etc/ssh/sshd_config file:
LogLevel INFO | Rationale: | SSH provides several logging levels with varying amounts of verbosity. DEBUG is specifically
not recommended other than strictly for debugging SSH communications since it provides
so much data that it is difficult to identify important security information. INFO level is the
basic level that only records login activity of SSH users. In many situations, such as Incident
Response, it is important to determine when a particular user was active on a system. The
logout record can eliminate those users who disconnected, which helps narrow the field. | Severity: | low | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sshd_set_loglevel_info | Identifiers and References | References:
5.2.5, AC-17(a), CM-6(a) | |
|
Rule
Disable Host-Based Authentication
[ref] | SSH's cryptographic host-based authentication is
more secure than .rhosts authentication. However, it is
not recommended that hosts unilaterally trust one another, even
within an organization.
To disable host-based authentication, add or correct the
following line in /etc/ssh/sshd_config :
HostbasedAuthentication no | Rationale: | SSH trust relationships mean a compromise on one host
can allow an attacker to move trivially to other hosts. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_disable_host_auth | Identifiers and References | References:
5.2.9, 11, 12, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, 9, 5.5.6, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS06.03, DSS06.06, 3.1.12, CCI-000366, 164.308(a)(4)(i), 164.308(b)(1), 164.308(b)(3), 164.310(b), 164.312(e)(1), 164.312(e)(2)(ii), 4.3.3.2.2, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 7.6, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.1, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, AC-3, AC-17(a), CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), PR.AC-4, PR.AC-6, PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, FIA_AFL.1, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00229, SRG-OS-000480-VMM-002000 | |
|
Rule
Set SSH Idle Timeout Interval
[ref] | SSH allows administrators to set an idle timeout interval. After this interval
has passed, the idle user will be automatically logged out.
To set an idle timeout interval, edit the following line in /etc/ssh/sshd_config as
follows:
ClientAliveInterval 300
The timeout interval is given in seconds. For example, have a timeout
of 10 minutes, set interval to 600.
If a shorter timeout has already been set for the login shell, that value will
preempt any SSH setting made in /etc/ssh/sshd_config . Keep in mind that
some processes may stop SSH from correctly detecting that the user is idle. | Rationale: | Terminating an idle ssh session within a short time period reduces the window of
opportunity for unauthorized personnel to take control of a management session
enabled on the console or console port that has been let unattended. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sshd_set_idle_timeout | Identifiers and References | References:
NT28(R29), 5.2.16, 1, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, 7, 8, 5.5.6, APO13.01, BAI03.01, BAI03.02, BAI03.03, DSS01.03, DSS03.05, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS05.10, DSS06.03, DSS06.10, 3.1.11, CCI-000879, CCI-001133, CCI-002361, 4.3.3.2.2, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 6.2, A.12.4.1, A.12.4.3, A.14.1.1, A.14.2.1, A.14.2.5, A.18.1.4, A.6.1.2, A.6.1.5, A.7.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.1, A.9.2.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.2.4, A.9.2.6, A.9.3.1, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.2, A.9.4.3, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(a), AC-17(a), AC-2(5), AC-12, AC-17(a), SC-10, CM-6(a), DE.CM-1, DE.CM-3, PR.AC-1, PR.AC-4, PR.AC-6, PR.AC-7, PR.IP-2, Req-8.1.8, SRG-OS-000126-GPOS-00066, SRG-OS-000163-GPOS-00072, SRG-OS-000279-GPOS-00109, SRG-OS-000395-GPOS-00175, SRG-OS-000480-VMM-002000 | |
|
Rule
Enable SSH Warning Banner
[ref] | To enable the warning banner and ensure it is consistent
across the system, add or correct the following line in /etc/ssh/sshd_config :
Banner /etc/issue
Another section contains information on how to create an
appropriate system-wide warning banner. | Rationale: | The warning message reinforces policy awareness during the logon process and
facilitates possible legal action against attackers. Alternatively, systems
whose ownership should not be obvious should ensure usage of a banner that does
not provide easy attribution. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sshd_enable_warning_banner | Identifiers and References | References:
5.2.19, 1, 12, 15, 16, 5.5.6, DSS05.04, DSS05.10, DSS06.10, 3.1.9, CCI-000048, CCI-000050, CCI-001384, CCI-001385, CCI-001386, CCI-001387, CCI-001388, 164.308(a)(4)(i), 164.308(b)(1), 164.308(b)(3), 164.310(b), 164.312(e)(1), 164.312(e)(2)(ii), 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.2, SR 1.5, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, A.18.1.4, A.9.2.1, A.9.2.4, A.9.3.1, A.9.4.2, A.9.4.3, AC-8(a), AC-8(c), AC-17(a), CM-6(a), PR.AC-7, FMT_MOF_EXT.1, SRG-OS-000023-GPOS-00006, SRG-OS-000024-GPOS-00007, SRG-OS-000228-GPOS-00088, SRG-OS-000023-VMM-000060, SRG-OS-000024-VMM-000070 | |
|
Rule
Disable SSH Access via Empty Passwords
[ref] | To explicitly disallow SSH login from accounts with
empty passwords, add or correct the following line in /etc/ssh/sshd_config :
PermitEmptyPasswords no
Any accounts with empty passwords should be disabled immediately, and PAM configuration
should prevent users from being able to assign themselves empty passwords. | Rationale: | Configuring this setting for the SSH daemon provides additional assurance
that remote login via SSH will require a password, even in the event of
misconfiguration elsewhere. | Severity: | high | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sshd_disable_empty_passwords | Identifiers and References | References:
NT007(R17), 5.2.11, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, 9, 5.5.6, APO01.06, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, DSS06.03, DSS06.06, 3.1.1, 3.1.5, CCI-000366, CCI-000766, 164.308(a)(4)(i), 164.308(b)(1), 164.308(b)(3), 164.310(b), 164.312(e)(1), 164.312(e)(2)(ii), 4.3.3.2.2, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 5.2, SR 7.6, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.1, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, AC-17(a), CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), PR.AC-4, PR.AC-6, PR.DS-5, PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, FIA_AFL.1, SRG-OS-000106-GPOS-00053, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00229, SRG-OS-000480-VMM-002000 | |
|
Rule
Disable SSH Support for .rhosts Files
[ref] | SSH can emulate the behavior of the obsolete rsh
command in allowing users to enable insecure access to their
accounts via .rhosts files.
To ensure this behavior is disabled, add or correct the
following line in /etc/ssh/sshd_config :
IgnoreRhosts yes | Rationale: | SSH trust relationships mean a compromise on one host
can allow an attacker to move trivially to other hosts. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sshd_disable_rhosts | Identifiers and References | References:
5.2.8, 11, 12, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, 9, 5.5.6, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS06.03, DSS06.06, 3.1.12, CCI-000366, 4.3.3.2.2, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 7.6, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.1, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, AC-17(a), CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), PR.AC-4, PR.AC-6, PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, FIA_AFL.1, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, SRG-OS-000107-VMM-000530 | |
|
Rule
Do Not Allow SSH Environment Options
[ref] | To ensure users are not able to override environment
variables of the SSH daemon, add or correct the following line
in /etc/ssh/sshd_config :
PermitUserEnvironment no | Rationale: | SSH environment options potentially allow users to bypass
access restriction in some configurations. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sshd_do_not_permit_user_env | Identifiers and References | References:
5.2.12, 11, 3, 9, 5.5.6, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, 3.1.12, CCI-000366, 164.308(a)(4)(i), 164.308(b)(1), 164.308(b)(3), 164.310(b), 164.312(e)(1), 164.312(e)(2)(ii), 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 7.6, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, AC-17(a), CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), PR.IP-1, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00229, SRG-OS-000480-VMM-002000 | |
|
Rule
Set SSH authentication attempt limit
[ref] | The MaxAuthTries parameter specifies the maximum number of authentication attempts
permitted per connection. Once the number of failures reaches half this value, additional failures are logged.
to set MaxAUthTries edit /etc/ssh/sshd_config as follows:
MaxAuthTries 4 | Rationale: | Setting the MaxAuthTries parameter to a low number will minimize the risk of successful
brute force attacks to the SSH server. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sshd_set_max_auth_tries | Identifiers and References | References:
5.2.7 | |
|
Rule
Use Only Strong Ciphers
[ref] | Limit the ciphers to strong algorithms.
Counter (CTR) mode is also preferred over cipher-block chaining (CBC) mode.
The following line in /etc/ssh/sshd_config
demonstrates use of those ciphers:
Ciphers chacha20-poly1305@openssh.com,aes256-gcm@openssh.com,aes128-gcm@openssh.com,aes256-ctr,aes192-ctr,aes128-ctr
The man page sshd_config(5) contains a list of supported ciphers. | Rationale: | Based on research conducted at various institutions, it was determined that the symmetric
portion of the SSH Transport Protocol (as described in RFC 4253) has security weaknesses
that allowed recovery of up to 32 bits of plaintext from a block of ciphertext that was
encrypted with the Cipher Block Chaining (CBD) method. From that research, new Counter
mode algorithms (as described in RFC4344) were designed that are not vulnerable to these
types of attacks and these algorithms are now recommended for standard use. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sshd_use_strong_ciphers | Identifiers and References | References:
5.2.13 | |
|
Rule
Set SSH Client Alive Max Count
[ref] | To ensure the SSH idle timeout occurs precisely when the ClientAliveInterval is set,
edit /etc/ssh/sshd_config as follows:
ClientAliveCountMax 0 | Rationale: | This ensures a user login will be terminated as soon as the ClientAliveInterval
is reached. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sshd_set_keepalive | Identifiers and References | References:
1, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, 7, 8, 5.5.6, APO13.01, BAI03.01, BAI03.02, BAI03.03, DSS01.03, DSS03.05, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS05.10, DSS06.03, DSS06.10, 3.1.11, CCI-000879, CCI-001133, CCI-002361, 164.308(a)(4)(i), 164.308(b)(1), 164.308(b)(3), 164.310(b), 164.312(e)(1), 164.312(e)(2)(ii), 4.3.3.2.2, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 6.2, A.12.4.1, A.12.4.3, A.14.1.1, A.14.2.1, A.14.2.5, A.18.1.4, A.6.1.2, A.6.1.5, A.7.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.1, A.9.2.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.2.4, A.9.2.6, A.9.3.1, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.2, A.9.4.3, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, AC-2(5), AC-12, AC-17(a), SC-10, CM-6(a), DE.CM-1, DE.CM-3, PR.AC-1, PR.AC-4, PR.AC-6, PR.AC-7, PR.IP-2, SRG-OS-000163-GPOS-00072, SRG-OS-000279-GPOS-00109, SRG-OS-000480-VMM-002000 | |
|
Rule
Disable SSH Root Login
[ref] | The root user should never be allowed to login to a
system directly over a network.
To disable root login via SSH, add or correct the following line
in /etc/ssh/sshd_config :
PermitRootLogin no | Rationale: | Even though the communications channel may be encrypted, an additional layer of
security is gained by extending the policy of not logging directly on as root.
In addition, logging in with a user-specific account provides individual
accountability of actions performed on the system and also helps to minimize
direct attack attempts on root's password. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sshd_disable_root_login | Identifiers and References | References:
NT28(R19), 5.2.11, 1, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, 5.5.6, APO01.06, DSS05.02, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS05.10, DSS06.02, DSS06.03, DSS06.06, DSS06.10, 3.1.1, 3.1.5, CCI-000366, CCI-000770, 164.308(a)(4)(i), 164.308(b)(1), 164.308(b)(3), 164.310(b), 164.312(e)(1), 164.312(e)(2)(ii), 4.3.3.2.2, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.18.1.4, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.1, A.9.2.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.2.4, A.9.2.6, A.9.3.1, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.2, A.9.4.3, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, AC-6(2), AC-17(a), IA-2, IA-2(5), CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), PR.AC-1, PR.AC-4, PR.AC-6, PR.AC-7, PR.DS-5, PR.PT-3, FIA_AFL.1, SRG-OS-000109-GPOS-00056, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227, SRG-OS-000480-VMM-002000 | |
|
Rule
Disable SSH TCP Forwarding
[ref] | The AllowTcpForwarding parameter specifies whether TCP forwarding is permitted.
To disable TCP forwarding, add or correct the
following line in /etc/ssh/sshd_config :
AllowTcpForwarding no | Rationale: | Leaving port forwarding enabled can expose the organization to security risks and back-doors. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sshd_disable_tcp_forwarding | Identifiers and References | References:
5.2.21 | |
|
Rule
Use Only Strong MACs
[ref] | Limit the MACs to strong hash algorithms.
The following line in /etc/ssh/sshd_config demonstrates use
of those MACs:
MACs hmac-sha2-512-etm@openssh.com,hmac-sha2-256-etm@openssh.com,umac-128-etm@openssh.com,hmac-sha2-512,hmac-sha2-256,hmac-ripemd160 | Rationale: | MD5 and 96-bit MAC algorithms are considered weak and have been shown to increase
exploitability in SSH downgrade attacks. Weak algorithms continue to have a great deal of
attention as a weak spot that can be exploited with expanded computing power. An
attacker that breaks the algorithm could take advantage of a MiTM position to decrypt the
SSH tunnel and capture credentials and information | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_sshd_use_strong_macs | Identifiers and References | References:
5.2.14 | |
|
Rule
Verify Permissions on SSH Server config file
[ref] |
To properly set the permissions of /etc/ssh/sshd_config , run the command:
$ sudo chmod 0600 /etc/ssh/sshd_config | Rationale: | Service configuration files enable or disable features of their respective
services that if configured incorrectly can lead to insecure and vulnerable
configurations. Therefore, service configuration files should be owned by the
correct group to prevent unauthorized changes. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_permissions_sshd_config | Identifiers and References | References:
12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, AC-17(a), CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227 | |
|
Rule
Verify Owner on SSH Server config file
[ref] |
To properly set the owner of /etc/ssh/sshd_config , run the command:
$ sudo chown root /etc/ssh/sshd_config | Rationale: | Service configuration files enable or disable features of their respective
services that if configured incorrectly can lead to insecure and vulnerable
configurations. Therefore, service configuration files should be owned by the
correct group to prevent unauthorized changes. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_owner_sshd_config | Identifiers and References | References:
12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, AC-17(a), CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227 | |
|
Rule
Verify Group Who Owns SSH Server config file
[ref] |
To properly set the group owner of /etc/ssh/sshd_config , run the command:
$ sudo chgrp root /etc/ssh/sshd_config | Rationale: | Service configuration files enable or disable features of their respective
services that if configured incorrectly can lead to insecure and vulnerable
configurations. Therefore, service configuration files should be owned by the
correct group to prevent unauthorized changes. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_groupowner_sshd_config | Identifiers and References | References:
12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, AC-17(a), CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227 | |
|
Rule
Verify Permissions on SSH Server Public *.pub Key Files
[ref] | To properly set the permissions of /etc/ssh/*.pub , run the command: $ sudo chmod 0644 /etc/ssh/*.pub | Rationale: | If a public host key file is modified by an unauthorized user, the SSH service
may be compromised. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_permissions_sshd_pub_key | Identifiers and References | References:
12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 3.1.13, 3.13.10, CCI-000366, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, AC-17(a), CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227 | |
|
Rule
Verify Permissions on SSH Server Private *_key Key Files
[ref] |
To properly set the permissions of /etc/ssh/*_key , run the command:
$ sudo chmod 0640 /etc/ssh/*_key | Rationale: | If an unauthorized user obtains the private SSH host key file, the host could be
impersonated. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_permissions_sshd_private_key | Identifiers and References | References:
12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 3.1.13, 3.13.10, CCI-000366, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, AC-17(a), CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227 | |
|
Group
FTP Server
Group contains 1 group and 1 rule |
[ref]
FTP is a common method for allowing remote access to
files. Like telnet, the FTP protocol is unencrypted, which means
that passwords and other data transmitted during the session can be
captured and that the session is vulnerable to hijacking.
Therefore, running the FTP server software is not recommended.
However, there are some FTP server configurations which may
be appropriate for some environments, particularly those which
allow only read-only anonymous access as a means of downloading
data available to the public. |
Group
Disable vsftpd if Possible
Group contains 1 rule |
[ref]
To minimize attack surface, disable vsftpd if at all
possible. |
Rule
Disable vsftpd Service
[ref] | The vsftpd service can be disabled with the following command: $ sudo systemctl disable vsftpd.service The vsftpd service can be masked with the following command: $ sudo systemctl mask vsftpd.service | Rationale: | Running FTP server software provides a network-based avenue
of attack, and should be disabled if not needed.
Furthermore, the FTP protocol is unencrypted and creates
a risk of compromising sensitive information. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_service_vsftpd_disabled | Identifiers and References | References:
2.2.9, 11, 14, 3, 9, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.05, DSS06.06, CCI-001436, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 7.6, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.9.1.2, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3 | |
|
Group
Proxy Server
Group contains 1 group and 1 rule |
[ref]
A proxy server is a very desirable target for a
potential adversary because much (or all) sensitive data for a
given infrastructure may flow through it. Therefore, if one is
required, the system acting as a proxy server should be dedicated
to that purpose alone and be stored in a physically secure
location. The system's default proxy server software is Squid, and
provided in an RPM package of the same name. |
Group
Disable Squid if Possible
Group contains 1 rule |
[ref]
If Squid was installed and activated, but the system
does not need to act as a proxy server, then it should be disabled
and removed. |
Rule
Disable Squid
[ref] | The squid service can be disabled with the following command: $ sudo systemctl disable squid.service The squid service can be masked with the following command: $ sudo systemctl mask squid.service | Rationale: | Running proxy server software provides a network-based avenue
of attack, and should be removed if not needed. | Severity: | unknown | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_service_squid_disabled | Identifiers and References | References:
2.2.13 | |
|
Group
LDAP
Group contains 2 groups and 2 rules |
[ref]
LDAP is a popular directory service, that is, a
standardized way of looking up information from a central database.
SUSE Linux Enterprise 15 includes software that enables a system to act as both
an LDAP client and server. |
Group
Configure OpenLDAP Clients
Group contains 1 rule |
[ref]
This section provides information on which security settings are
important to configure in OpenLDAP clients by manually editing the appropriate
configuration files. SUSE Linux Enterprise 15 provides an automated configuration tool called
authconfig and a graphical wrapper for authconfig called
system-config-authentication . However, these tools do not provide as
much control over configuration as manual editing of configuration files. The
authconfig tools do not allow you to specify locations of SSL certificate
files, which is useful when trying to use SSL cleanly across several protocols.
Installation and configuration of OpenLDAP on SUSE Linux Enterprise 15 is available at Warning:
Before configuring any system to be an
LDAP client, ensure that a working LDAP server is present on the
network. |
Rule
Ensure LDAP client is not installed
[ref] | The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is a service that provides
a method for looking up information from a central database.
The openldap-clients package can be removed with the following command:
$ sudo zypper remove openldap-clients | Rationale: | If the system does not need to act as an LDAP client, it is recommended that the software is removed to reduce the potential attack surface. | Severity: | low | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_package_openldap-clients_removed | Identifiers and References | | |
|
Group
Configure OpenLDAP Server
Group contains 1 rule |
[ref]
This section details some security-relevant settings
for an OpenLDAP server. |
Rule
Uninstall openldap-servers Package
[ref] | The openldap-servers RPM is not installed by default on a SUSE Linux Enterprise 15
system. It is needed only by the OpenLDAP server, not by the
clients which use LDAP for authentication. If the system is not
intended for use as an LDAP Server it should be removed. | Rationale: | Unnecessary packages should not be installed to decrease the attack
surface of the system. While this software is clearly essential on an LDAP
server, it is not necessary on typical desktop or workstation systems. | Severity: | low | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_package_openldap-servers_removed | Identifiers and References | References:
2.2.6, 11, 14, 3, 9, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.05, DSS06.06, CCI-000366, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 7.6, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.9.1.2, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3 | |
|
Group
SNMP Server
Group contains 1 group and 1 rule |
[ref]
The Simple Network Management Protocol allows
administrators to monitor the state of network devices, including
computers. Older versions of SNMP were well-known for weak
security, such as plaintext transmission of the community string
(used for authentication) and usage of easily-guessable
choices for the community string. |
Group
Disable SNMP Server if Possible
Group contains 1 rule |
[ref]
The system includes an SNMP daemon that allows for its remote
monitoring, though it not installed by default. If it was installed and
activated but is not needed, the software should be disabled and removed. |
Rule
Disable snmpd Service
[ref] | The snmpd service can be disabled with the following command: $ sudo systemctl disable snmpd.service The snmpd service can be masked with the following command: $ sudo systemctl mask snmpd.service | Rationale: | Running SNMP software provides a network-based avenue of attack, and
should be disabled if not needed. | Severity: | low | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_service_snmpd_disabled | Identifiers and References | References:
2.2.14, SRG-OS-000480-VMM-002000 | |
|
Group
Cron and At Daemons
Group contains 18 rules |
[ref]
The cron and at services are used to allow commands to
be executed at a later time. The cron service is required by almost
all systems to perform necessary maintenance tasks, while at may or
may not be required on a given system. Both daemons should be
configured defensively. |
Rule
Verify Group Who Owns cron.d
[ref] |
To properly set the group owner of /etc/cron.d , run the command:
$ sudo chgrp root /etc/cron.d | Rationale: | Service configuration files enable or disable features of their respective services that if configured incorrectly
can lead to insecure and vulnerable configurations. Therefore, service configuration files should be owned by the
correct group to prevent unauthorized changes. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_groupowner_cron_d | Identifiers and References | References:
12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227 | |
|
Rule
Verify Permissions on crontab
[ref] |
To properly set the permissions of /etc/crontab , run the command:
$ sudo chmod 0600 /etc/crontab | Rationale: | Service configuration files enable or disable features of their respective services that if configured incorrectly
can lead to insecure and vulnerable configurations. Therefore, service configuration files should have the
correct access rights to prevent unauthorized changes. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_permissions_crontab | Identifiers and References | References:
12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227 | |
|
Rule
Verify Group Who Owns Crontab
[ref] |
To properly set the group owner of /etc/crontab , run the command:
$ sudo chgrp root /etc/crontab | Rationale: | Service configuration files enable or disable features of their respective services that if configured incorrectly
can lead to insecure and vulnerable configurations. Therefore, service configuration files should be owned by the
correct group to prevent unauthorized changes. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_groupowner_crontab | Identifiers and References | References:
12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227 | |
|
Rule
Verify Group Who Owns cron.hourly
[ref] |
To properly set the group owner of /etc/cron.hourly , run the command:
$ sudo chgrp root /etc/cron.hourly | Rationale: | Service configuration files enable or disable features of their respective services that if configured incorrectly
can lead to insecure and vulnerable configurations. Therefore, service configuration files should be owned by the
correct group to prevent unauthorized changes. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_groupowner_cron_hourly | Identifiers and References | References:
12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227 | |
|
Rule
Verify Permissions on cron.monthly
[ref] |
To properly set the permissions of /etc/cron.monthly , run the command:
$ sudo chmod 0700 /etc/cron.monthly | Rationale: | Service configuration files enable or disable features of their respective services that if configured incorrectly
can lead to insecure and vulnerable configurations. Therefore, service configuration files should have the
correct access rights to prevent unauthorized changes. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_permissions_cron_monthly | Identifiers and References | References:
12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227 | |
|
Rule
Verify Group Who Owns cron.monthly
[ref] |
To properly set the group owner of /etc/cron.monthly , run the command:
$ sudo chgrp root /etc/cron.monthly | Rationale: | Service configuration files enable or disable features of their respective services that if configured incorrectly
can lead to insecure and vulnerable configurations. Therefore, service configuration files should be owned by the
correct group to prevent unauthorized changes. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_groupowner_cron_monthly | Identifiers and References | References:
12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227 | |
|
Rule
Verify Owner on cron.hourly
[ref] |
To properly set the owner of /etc/cron.hourly , run the command:
$ sudo chown root /etc/cron.hourly | Rationale: | Service configuration files enable or disable features of their respective services that if configured incorrectly
can lead to insecure and vulnerable configurations. Therefore, service configuration files should be owned by the
correct user to prevent unauthorized changes. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_owner_cron_hourly | Identifiers and References | References:
12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227 | |
|
Rule
Verify Owner on crontab
[ref] |
To properly set the owner of /etc/crontab , run the command:
$ sudo chown root /etc/crontab | Rationale: | Service configuration files enable or disable features of their respective services that if configured incorrectly
can lead to insecure and vulnerable configurations. Therefore, service configuration files should be owned by the
correct user to prevent unauthorized changes. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_owner_crontab | Identifiers and References | References:
12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227 | |
|
Rule
Verify Group Who Owns cron.daily
[ref] |
To properly set the group owner of /etc/cron.daily , run the command:
$ sudo chgrp root /etc/cron.daily | Rationale: | Service configuration files enable or disable features of their respective services that if configured incorrectly
can lead to insecure and vulnerable configurations. Therefore, service configuration files should be owned by the
correct group to prevent unauthorized changes. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_groupowner_cron_daily | Identifiers and References | References:
12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227 | |
|
Rule
Verify Owner on cron.monthly
[ref] |
To properly set the owner of /etc/cron.monthly , run the command:
$ sudo chown root /etc/cron.monthly | Rationale: | Service configuration files enable or disable features of their respective services that if configured incorrectly
can lead to insecure and vulnerable configurations. Therefore, service configuration files should be owned by the
correct user to prevent unauthorized changes. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_owner_cron_monthly | Identifiers and References | References:
12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227 | |
|
Rule
Verify Permissions on cron.weekly
[ref] |
To properly set the permissions of /etc/cron.weekly , run the command:
$ sudo chmod 0700 /etc/cron.weekly | Rationale: | Service configuration files enable or disable features of their respective services that if configured incorrectly
can lead to insecure and vulnerable configurations. Therefore, service configuration files should have the
correct access rights to prevent unauthorized changes. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_permissions_cron_weekly | Identifiers and References | References:
12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227 | |
|
Rule
Verify Permissions on cron.hourly
[ref] |
To properly set the permissions of /etc/cron.hourly , run the command:
$ sudo chmod 0700 /etc/cron.hourly | Rationale: | Service configuration files enable or disable features of their respective services that if configured incorrectly
can lead to insecure and vulnerable configurations. Therefore, service configuration files should have the
correct access rights to prevent unauthorized changes. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_permissions_cron_hourly | Identifiers and References | References:
12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227 | |
|
Rule
Verify Permissions on cron.daily
[ref] |
To properly set the permissions of /etc/cron.daily , run the command:
$ sudo chmod 0700 /etc/cron.daily | Rationale: | Service configuration files enable or disable features of their respective services that if configured incorrectly
can lead to insecure and vulnerable configurations. Therefore, service configuration files should have the
correct access rights to prevent unauthorized changes. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_permissions_cron_daily | Identifiers and References | References:
12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227 | |
|
Rule
Verify Owner on cron.weekly
[ref] |
To properly set the owner of /etc/cron.weekly , run the command:
$ sudo chown root /etc/cron.weekly | Rationale: | Service configuration files enable or disable features of their respective services that if configured incorrectly
can lead to insecure and vulnerable configurations. Therefore, service configuration files should be owned by the
correct user to prevent unauthorized changes. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_owner_cron_weekly | Identifiers and References | References:
12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227 | |
|
Rule
Verify Group Who Owns cron.weekly
[ref] |
To properly set the group owner of /etc/cron.weekly , run the command:
$ sudo chgrp root /etc/cron.weekly | Rationale: | Service configuration files enable or disable features of their respective services that if configured incorrectly
can lead to insecure and vulnerable configurations. Therefore, service configuration files should be owned by the
correct group to prevent unauthorized changes. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_groupowner_cron_weekly | Identifiers and References | References:
12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227 | |
|
Rule
Verify Owner on cron.d
[ref] |
To properly set the owner of /etc/cron.d , run the command:
$ sudo chown root /etc/cron.d | Rationale: | Service configuration files enable or disable features of their respective services that if configured incorrectly
can lead to insecure and vulnerable configurations. Therefore, service configuration files should be owned by the
correct user to prevent unauthorized changes. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_owner_cron_d | Identifiers and References | References:
12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227 | |
|
Rule
Verify Permissions on cron.d
[ref] |
To properly set the permissions of /etc/cron.d , run the command:
$ sudo chmod 0700 /etc/cron.d | Rationale: | Service configuration files enable or disable features of their respective services that if configured incorrectly
can lead to insecure and vulnerable configurations. Therefore, service configuration files should have the
correct access rights to prevent unauthorized changes. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_permissions_cron_d | Identifiers and References | References:
12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227 | |
|
Rule
Verify Owner on cron.daily
[ref] |
To properly set the owner of /etc/cron.daily , run the command:
$ sudo chown root /etc/cron.daily | Rationale: | Service configuration files enable or disable features of their respective services that if configured incorrectly
can lead to insecure and vulnerable configurations. Therefore, service configuration files should be owned by the
correct user to prevent unauthorized changes. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_file_owner_cron_daily | Identifiers and References | References:
12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, APO01.06, DSS05.04, DSS05.07, DSS06.02, 4.3.3.7.3, SR 2.1, SR 5.2, A.10.1.1, A.11.1.4, A.11.1.5, A.11.2.1, A.13.1.1, A.13.1.3, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.13.2.4, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.7.1.2, A.7.3.1, A.8.2.2, A.8.2.3, A.9.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-6(a), AC-6(1), PR.AC-4, PR.DS-5, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227 | |
|
Group
X Window System
Group contains 1 group and 2 rules |
[ref]
The X Window System implementation included with the
system is called X.org. |
Group
Disable X Windows
Group contains 2 rules |
[ref]
Unless there is a mission-critical reason for the
system to run a graphical user interface, ensure X is not set to start
automatically at boot and remove the X Windows software packages.
There is usually no reason to run X Windows
on a dedicated server system, as it increases the system's attack surface and consumes
system resources. Administrators of server systems should instead login via
SSH or on the text console. |
Rule
Remove the X Windows Package Group
[ref] | By removing the xorg-x11-server-common package, the system no longer has X Windows
installed. If X Windows is not installed then the system cannot boot into graphical user mode.
This prevents the system from being accidentally or maliciously booted into a graphical.target
mode. To do so, run the following command:
$ sudo zypper groupremove "X Window System"
$ sudo zypper remove xorg-x11-server-common Warning:
The installation and use of a Graphical User Interface (GUI) increases your attack vector and decreases your
overall security posture. Removing the package xorg-x11-server-common package will remove the graphical target
which might bring your system to an inconsistent state requiring additional configuration to access the system
again. If a GUI is an operational requirement, a tailored profile that removes this rule should used before
continuing installation. | Rationale: | Unnecessary service packages must not be installed to decrease the attack surface of the system. X windows has a long history of security
vulnerabilities and should not be installed unless approved and documented. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_package_xorg-x11-server-common_removed | Identifiers and References | References:
2.2.2, 12, 15, 8, APO13.01, DSS01.04, DSS05.02, DSS05.03, CCI-000366, 4.3.3.6.6, SR 1.13, SR 2.6, SR 3.1, SR 3.5, SR 3.8, SR 4.1, SR 4.3, SR 5.1, SR 5.2, SR 5.3, SR 7.1, SR 7.6, A.11.2.6, A.13.1.1, A.13.2.1, A.14.1.3, A.6.2.1, A.6.2.2, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), PR.AC-3, PR.PT-4, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227 | |
|
Rule
Disable X Windows Startup By Setting Default Target
[ref] | Systems that do not require a graphical user interface should only boot by
default into multi-user.target mode. This prevents accidental booting of the system
into a graphical.target mode. Setting the system's default target to
multi-user.target will prevent automatic startup of the X server. To do so, run:
$ systemctl set-default multi-user.target
You should see the following output:
Removed symlink /etc/systemd/system/default.target.
Created symlink from /etc/systemd/system/default.target to /usr/lib/systemd/system/multi-user.target. | Rationale: | Services that are not required for system and application processes
must not be active to decrease the attack surface of the system. X windows has a
long history of security vulnerabilities and should not be used unless approved
and documented. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_xwindows_runlevel_target | Identifiers and References | References:
12, 15, 8, APO13.01, DSS01.04, DSS05.02, DSS05.03, CCI-000366, 4.3.3.6.6, SR 1.13, SR 2.6, SR 3.1, SR 3.5, SR 3.8, SR 4.1, SR 4.3, SR 5.1, SR 5.2, SR 5.3, SR 7.1, SR 7.6, A.11.2.6, A.13.1.1, A.13.2.1, A.14.1.3, A.6.2.1, A.6.2.2, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), PR.AC-3, PR.PT-4, SRG-OS-000480-GPOS-00227 | |
|
Group
IMAP and POP3 Server
Group contains 1 group and 1 rule |
[ref]
Dovecot provides IMAP and POP3 services. It is not
installed by default. The project page at
http://www.dovecot.org
contains more detailed information about Dovecot
configuration. |
Group
Disable Dovecot
Group contains 1 rule |
[ref]
If the system does not need to operate as an IMAP or
POP3 server, the dovecot software should be disabled and removed. |
Rule
Disable Dovecot Service
[ref] | The dovecot service can be disabled with the following command: $ sudo systemctl disable dovecot.service The dovecot service can be masked with the following command: $ sudo systemctl mask dovecot.service | Rationale: | Running an IMAP or POP3 server provides a network-based
avenue of attack, and should be disabled if not needed. | Severity: | unknown | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_service_dovecot_disabled | Identifiers and References | References:
2.2.11 | |
|
Group
DNS Server
Group contains 1 group and 1 rule |
[ref]
Most organizations have an operational need to run at
least one nameserver. However, there are many common attacks
involving DNS server software, and this server software should
be disabled on any system
on which it is not needed. |
Group
Disable DNS Server
Group contains 1 rule |
[ref]
DNS software should be disabled on any systems which does not
need to be a nameserver. Note that the BIND DNS server software is
not installed on SUSE Linux Enterprise 15 by default. The remainder of this section
discusses secure configuration of systems which must be
nameservers. |
Rule
Disable named Service
[ref] | The named service can be disabled with the following command: $ sudo systemctl disable named.service The named service can be masked with the following command: $ sudo systemctl mask named.service | Rationale: | All network services involve some risk of compromise due to
implementation flaws and should be disabled if possible. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_service_named_disabled | Identifiers and References | References:
2.2.8, 11, 14, 3, 9, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.05, DSS06.06, CCI-000366, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 7.6, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.9.1.2, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3 | |
|
Group
Network Time Protocol
Group contains 4 rules |
[ref]
The Network Time Protocol is used to manage the system
clock over a network. Computer clocks are not very accurate, so
time will drift unpredictably on unmanaged systems. Central time
protocols can be used both to ensure that time is consistent among
a network of systems, and that their time is consistent with the
outside world.
If every system on a network reliably reports the same time, then it is much
easier to correlate log messages in case of an attack. In addition, a number of
cryptographic protocols (such as Kerberos) use timestamps to prevent certain
types of attacks. If your network does not have synchronized time, these
protocols may be unreliable or even unusable.
Depending on the specifics of the network, global time accuracy may be just as
important as local synchronization, or not very important at all. If your
network is connected to the Internet, using a public timeserver (or one
provided by your enterprise) provides globally accurate timestamps which may be
essential in investigating or responding to an attack which originated outside
of your network.
A typical network setup involves a small number of internal systems operating
as NTP servers, and the remainder obtaining time information from those
internal servers.
There is a choice between the daemons ntpd and chronyd , which
are available from the repositories in the ntp and chrony
packages respectively.
The default chronyd daemon can work well when external time references
are only intermittently accesible, can perform well even when the network is
congested for longer periods of time, can usually synchronize the clock faster
and with better time accuracy, and quickly adapts to sudden changes in the rate
of the clock, for example, due to changes in the temperature of the crystal
oscillator. Chronyd should be considered for all systems which are
frequently suspended or otherwise intermittently disconnected and reconnected
to a network. Mobile and virtual systems for example.
The ntpd NTP daemon fully supports NTP protocol version 4 (RFC 5905),
including broadcast, multicast, manycast clients and servers, and the orphan
mode. It also supports extra authentication schemes based on public-key
cryptography (RFC 5906). The NTP daemon (ntpd ) should be considered
for systems which are normally kept permanently on. Systems which are required
to use broadcast or multicast IP, or to perform authentication of packets with
the Autokey protocol, should consider using ntpd .
Refer to
https://docs.fedoraproject.org/en-US/fedora/rawhide/system-administrators-guide/servers/Configuring_NTP_Using_the_chrony_Suite/
for more detailed comparison of features of chronyd
and ntpd daemon features respectively, and for further guidance how to
choose between the two NTP daemons.
The upstream manual pages at
http://chrony.tuxfamily.org/manual.html for
chronyd and
http://www.ntp.org for ntpd provide additional
information on the capabilities and configuration of each of the NTP daemons. |
Rule
The Chrony package is installed
[ref] | System time should be synchronized between all systems in an environment. This is
typically done by establishing an authoritative time server or set of servers and having all
systems synchronize their clocks to them.
The chrony package can be installed with the following command:
$ sudo zypper install chrony | Rationale: | Time synchronization is important to support time sensitive security mechanisms like
Kerberos and also ensures log files have consistent time records across the enterprise,
which aids in forensic investigations. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_package_chrony_installed | Identifiers and References | | |
|
Rule
The Chronyd service is enabled
[ref] | chrony is a daemon which implements the Network Time Protocol (NTP) is designed to
synchronize system clocks across a variety of systems and use a source that is highly
accurate. More information on chrony can be found at
http://chrony.tuxfamily.org/.
Chrony can be configured to be a client and/or a server.
To enable Chronyd service, you can run:
# systemctl enable chronyd.service
This recommendation only applies if chrony is in use on the system. | Rationale: | If chrony is in use on the system proper configuration is vital to ensuring time
synchronization is working properly. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_service_chronyd_enabled | Identifiers and References | | |
|
Rule
A remote time server for Chrony is configured
[ref] | Chrony is a daemon which implements the Network Time Protocol (NTP). It is designed to
synchronize system clocks across a variety of systems and use a source that is highly
accurate. More information on chrony can be found at
http://chrony.tuxfamily.org/.
Chrony can be configured to be a client and/or a server.
Add or edit server or pool lines to /etc/chrony.conf as appropriate:
server <remote-server>
Multiple servers may be configured. | Rationale: | If chrony is in use on the system proper configuration is vital to ensuring time
synchronization is working properly. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_chronyd_specify_remote_server | Identifiers and References | | |
|
Rule
Ensure that chronyd is running under chrony user account
[ref] | chrony is a daemon which implements the Network Time Protocol (NTP). It is designed to
synchronize system clocks across a variety of systems and use a source that is highly
accurate. More information on chrony can be found at
http://chrony.tuxfamily.org/.
Chrony can be configured to be a client and/or a server.
To ensure that chronyd is running under chrony user account, Add or edit the
OPTIONS variable in /etc/sysconfig/chronyd to include -u chrony :
OPTIONS="-u chrony"
This recommendation only applies if chrony is in use on the system. | Rationale: | If chrony is in use on the system proper configuration is vital to ensuring time synchronization
is working properly. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_chronyd_run_as_chrony_user | Identifiers and References | | |
|
Group
Print Support
Group contains 1 rule |
[ref]
The Common Unix Printing System (CUPS) service provides both local
and network printing support. A system running the CUPS service can accept
print jobs from other systems, process them, and send them to the appropriate
printer. It also provides an interface for remote administration through a web
browser. The CUPS service is installed and activated by default. The project
homepage and more detailed documentation are available at
http://www.cups.org.
|
Rule
Disable the CUPS Service
[ref] | The cups service can be disabled with the following command: $ sudo systemctl disable cups.service The cups service can be masked with the following command: $ sudo systemctl mask cups.service | Rationale: | Turn off unneeded services to reduce attack surface. | Severity: | unknown | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_service_cups_disabled | Identifiers and References | References:
2.2.4, 11, 14, 3, 9, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.05, DSS06.06, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 7.6, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.9.1.2, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3 | |
|
Group
Web Server
Group contains 1 group and 1 rule |
[ref]
The web server is responsible for providing access to
content via the HTTP protocol. Web servers represent a significant
security risk because:
- The HTTP port is commonly probed by malicious sources
- Web server software is very complex, and includes a long
history of vulnerabilities
- The HTTP protocol is unencrypted and vulnerable to passive
monitoring
The system's default web server software is Apache 2 and is
provided in the RPM package httpd . |
Group
Disable Apache if Possible
Group contains 1 rule |
[ref]
If Apache was installed and activated, but the system
does not need to act as a web server, then it should be disabled
and removed from the system. |
Rule
Disable httpd Service
[ref] | The httpd service can be disabled with the following command: $ sudo systemctl disable httpd.service The httpd service can be masked with the following command: $ sudo systemctl mask httpd.service | Rationale: | Running web server software provides a network-based avenue
of attack, and should be disabled if not needed. | Severity: | unknown | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_service_httpd_disabled | Identifiers and References | References:
2.2.10, 11, 14, 3, 9, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.05, DSS06.06, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 7.6, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.9.1.2, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3 | |
|
Group
Avahi Server
Group contains 1 group and 1 rule |
[ref]
The Avahi daemon implements the DNS Service Discovery
and Multicast DNS protocols, which provide service and host
discovery on a network. It allows a system to automatically
identify resources on the network, such as printers or web servers.
This capability is also known as mDNSresponder and is a major part
of Zeroconf networking. |
Group
Disable Avahi Server if Possible
Group contains 1 rule |
[ref]
Because the Avahi daemon service keeps an open network
port, it is subject to network attacks.
Disabling it can reduce the system's vulnerability to such attacks. |
Rule
Disable Avahi Server Software
[ref] | The avahi-daemon service can be disabled with the following command: $ sudo systemctl disable avahi-daemon.service The avahi-daemon service can be masked with the following command: $ sudo systemctl mask avahi-daemon.service | Rationale: | Because the Avahi daemon service keeps an open network
port, it is subject to network attacks. Its functionality
is convenient but is only appropriate if the local network
can be trusted. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_service_avahi-daemon_disabled | Identifiers and References | References:
2.2.3, 11, 14, 3, 9, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS05.02, DSS05.05, DSS06.06, CCI-000366, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 7.6, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.9.1.2, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3 | |
|
Group
Obsolete Services
Group contains 5 groups and 7 rules |
[ref]
This section discusses a number of network-visible
services which have historically caused problems for system
security, and for which disabling or severely limiting the service
has been the best available guidance for some time. As a result of
this, many of these services are not installed as part of SUSE Linux Enterprise 15
by default.
Organizations which are running these services should
switch to more secure equivalents as soon as possible.
If it remains absolutely necessary to run one of
these services for legacy reasons, care should be taken to restrict
the service as much as possible, for instance by configuring host
firewall software such as iptables to restrict access to the
vulnerable service to only those remote hosts which have a known
need to use it. |
Group
Rlogin, Rsh, and Rexec
Group contains 1 rule |
[ref]
The Berkeley r-commands are legacy services which
allow cleartext remote access and have an insecure trust
model. |
Rule
Uninstall rsh Package
[ref] | The rsh package contains the client commands
for the rsh services | Rationale: | These legacy clients contain numerous security exposures and have
been replaced with the more secure SSH package. Even if the server is removed,
it is best to ensure the clients are also removed to prevent users from
inadvertently attempting to use these commands and therefore exposing
their credentials. Note that removing the rsh package removes
the clients for rsh ,rcp , and rlogin . | Severity: | unknown | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_package_rsh_removed | Identifiers and References | References:
2.3.2, 3.1.13, 164.308(a)(4)(i), 164.308(b)(1), 164.308(b)(3), 164.310(b), 164.312(e)(1), 164.312(e)(2)(ii), A.8.2.3, A.13.1.1, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3 | |
|
Group
Chat/Messaging Services
Group contains 1 rule |
[ref]
The talk software makes it possible for users to send and receive messages
across systems through a terminal session. |
Rule
Uninstall talk Package
[ref] | The talk package contains the client program for the
Internet talk protocol, which allows the user to chat with other users on
different systems. Talk is a communication program which copies lines from one
terminal to the terminal of another user.
The talk package can be removed with the following command:
$ sudo zypper remove talk | Rationale: | The talk software presents a security risk as it uses unencrypted protocols
for communications. Removing the talk package decreases the
risk of the accidental (or intentional) activation of talk client program. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_package_talk_removed | Identifiers and References | References:
2.3.3, 164.308(a)(4)(i), 164.308(b)(1), 164.308(b)(3), 164.310(b), 164.312(e)(1), 164.312(e)(2)(ii) | |
|
Group
Xinetd
Group contains 1 rule |
[ref]
The xinetd service acts as a dedicated listener for some
network services (mostly, obsolete ones) and can be used to provide access
controls and perform some logging. It has been largely obsoleted by other
features, and it is not installed by default. The older Inetd service
is not even available as part of SUSE Linux Enterprise 15. |
Rule
Disable xinetd Service
[ref] | The xinetd service can be disabled with the following command: $ sudo systemctl disable xinetd.service The xinetd service can be masked with the following command: $ sudo systemctl mask xinetd.service | Rationale: | The xinetd service provides a dedicated listener service for some programs,
which is no longer necessary for commonly-used network services. Disabling
it ensures that these uncommon services are not running, and also prevents
attacks against xinetd itself. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_service_xinetd_disabled | Identifiers and References | References:
2.1.10, 11, 12, 14, 15, 3, 8, 9, APO13.01, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS01.04, DSS05.02, DSS05.03, DSS05.05, DSS06.06, 3.4.7, CCI-000305, 164.308(a)(4)(i), 164.308(b)(1), 164.308(b)(3), 164.310(b), 164.312(e)(1), 164.312(e)(2)(ii), 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 3.1, SR 3.5, SR 3.8, SR 4.1, SR 4.3, SR 5.1, SR 5.2, SR 5.3, SR 7.1, SR 7.6, A.11.2.6, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.13.1.1, A.13.2.1, A.14.1.3, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.6.2.1, A.6.2.2, A.9.1.2, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), PR.AC-3, PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, PR.PT-4 | |
|
Group
Telnet
Group contains 1 rule |
[ref]
The telnet protocol does not provide confidentiality or integrity
for information transmitted on the network. This includes authentication
information such as passwords. Organizations which use telnet should be
actively working to migrate to a more secure protocol. |
Rule
Remove telnet Clients
[ref] | The telnet client allows users to start connections to other systems via
the telnet protocol. | Rationale: | The telnet protocol is insecure and unencrypted. The use
of an unencrypted transmission medium could allow an unauthorized user
to steal credentials. The ssh package provides an
encrypted session and stronger security and is included in SUSE Linux Enterprise 15. | Severity: | low | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_package_telnet_removed | Identifiers and References | References:
3.1.13, 164.308(a)(4)(i), 164.308(b)(1), 164.308(b)(3), 164.310(b), 164.312(e)(1), 164.312(e)(2)(ii), A.8.2.3, A.13.1.1, A.13.2.1, A.13.2.3, A.14.1.2, A.14.1.3 | |
|
Group
NIS
Group contains 2 rules |
[ref]
The Network Information Service (NIS), also known as 'Yellow
Pages' (YP), and its successor NIS+ have been made obsolete by
Kerberos, LDAP, and other modern centralized authentication
services. NIS should not be used because it suffers from security
problems inherent in its design, such as inadequate protection of
important authentication information. |
Rule
Uninstall ypserv Package
[ref] | The ypserv package can be removed with the following command:
$ sudo zypper remove ypserv | Rationale: | The NIS service provides an unencrypted authentication service which does
not provide for the confidentiality and integrity of user passwords or the
remote session.
Removing the ypserv package decreases the risk of the accidental
(or intentional) activation of NIS or NIS+ services. | Severity: | high | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_package_ypserv_removed | Identifiers and References | References:
2.2.17, 11, 12, 14, 15, 3, 8, 9, APO13.01, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS01.04, DSS05.02, DSS05.03, DSS05.05, DSS06.06, CCI-000381, 164.308(a)(4)(i), 164.308(b)(1), 164.308(b)(3), 164.310(b), 164.312(e)(1), 164.312(e)(2)(ii), 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 3.1, SR 3.5, SR 3.8, SR 4.1, SR 4.3, SR 5.1, SR 5.2, SR 5.3, SR 7.1, SR 7.6, A.11.2.6, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.13.1.1, A.13.2.1, A.14.1.3, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.6.2.1, A.6.2.2, A.9.1.2, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), IA-5(1)(c), PR.AC-3, PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, PR.PT-4, SRG-OS-000095-GPOS-00049 | |
|
Rule
Remove NIS Client
[ref] | The Network Information Service (NIS), formerly known as Yellow Pages,
is a client-server directory service protocol used to distribute system configuration
files. The NIS client (ypbind ) was used to bind a system to an NIS server
and receive the distributed configuration files. | Rationale: | The NIS service is inherently an insecure system that has been vulnerable
to DOS attacks, buffer overflows and has poor authentication for querying
NIS maps. NIS generally has been replaced by such protocols as Lightweight
Directory Access Protocol (LDAP). It is recommended that the service be
removed. | Severity: | unknown | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_package_ypbind_removed | Identifiers and References | References:
164.308(a)(4)(i), 164.308(b)(1), 164.308(b)(3), 164.310(b), 164.312(e)(1), 164.312(e)(2)(ii) | |
|
Rule
Ensure rsyncd service is diabled
[ref] |
The rsyncd service can be disabled with the following command:
$ sudo systemctl disable rsyncd.service
The rsyncd service can be masked with the following command:
$ sudo systemctl mask rsyncd.service | Rationale: | The rsyncd service presents a security risk as it uses unencrypted protocols for
communication. | Severity: | medium | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_service_rsyncd_disabled | Identifiers and References | References:
2.2.17 | |
|
Group
Deprecated services
Group contains 1 rule |
[ref]
Some deprecated software services impact the overall system security due to their behavior (leak of
confidentiality in network exchange, usage as uncontrolled communication channel, risk associated with the service due to its old age, etc. |
Rule
Uninstall the telnet server
[ref] | The telnet daemon should be uninstalled. | Rationale: | telnet allows clear text communications, and does not protect
any data transmission between client and server. Any confidential data
can be listened and no integrity checking is made.'
| Severity: | high | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_package_telnetd_removed | Identifiers and References | References:
NT28(R1), 11, 12, 14, 15, 3, 8, 9, APO13.01, BAI10.01, BAI10.02, BAI10.03, BAI10.05, DSS01.04, DSS05.02, DSS05.03, DSS05.05, DSS06.06, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, 4.3.4.3.2, 4.3.4.3.3, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, SR 3.1, SR 3.5, SR 3.8, SR 4.1, SR 4.3, SR 5.1, SR 5.2, SR 5.3, SR 7.1, SR 7.6, A.11.2.6, A.12.1.2, A.12.5.1, A.12.6.2, A.13.1.1, A.13.2.1, A.14.1.3, A.14.2.2, A.14.2.3, A.14.2.4, A.6.2.1, A.6.2.2, A.9.1.2, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), PR.AC-3, PR.IP-1, PR.PT-3, PR.PT-4 | |
|
Group
NFS and RPC
Group contains 4 groups and 2 rules |
[ref]
The Network File System is a popular distributed filesystem for
the Unix environment, and is very widely deployed. This section discusses the
circumstances under which it is possible to disable NFS and its dependencies,
and then details steps which should be taken to secure
NFS's configuration. This section is relevant to systems operating as NFS
clients, as well as to those operating as NFS servers. |
Group
Configure NFS Clients
Group contains 1 group and 1 rule |
[ref]
The steps in this section are appropriate for systems which operate as NFS clients. |
Group
Disable NFS Server Daemons
Group contains 1 rule |
[ref]
There is no need to run the NFS server daemons nfs and
rpcsvcgssd except on a small number of properly secured systems
designated as NFS servers. Ensure that these daemons are turned off on
clients. |
Rule
Disable Network File System (nfs)
[ref] | The Network File System (NFS) service allows remote hosts to mount
and interact with shared filesystems on the local system. If the local system
is not designated as a NFS server then this service should be disabled.
The nfs service can be disabled with the following command:
$ sudo systemctl disable nfs.service
The nfs service can be masked with the following command:
$ sudo systemctl mask nfs.service | Rationale: | Unnecessary services should be disabled to decrease the attack surface of the system. | Severity: | unknown | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_service_nfs_disabled | Identifiers and References | References:
2.2.7, 11, 12, 14, 15, 16, 18, 3, 5, DSS05.02, DSS05.04, DSS05.05, DSS05.07, DSS06.03, DSS06.06, 4.3.3.2.2, 4.3.3.5.1, 4.3.3.5.2, 4.3.3.5.3, 4.3.3.5.4, 4.3.3.5.5, 4.3.3.5.6, 4.3.3.5.7, 4.3.3.5.8, 4.3.3.6.1, 4.3.3.6.2, 4.3.3.6.3, 4.3.3.6.4, 4.3.3.6.5, 4.3.3.6.6, 4.3.3.6.7, 4.3.3.6.8, 4.3.3.6.9, 4.3.3.7.1, 4.3.3.7.2, 4.3.3.7.3, 4.3.3.7.4, SR 1.1, SR 1.10, SR 1.11, SR 1.12, SR 1.13, SR 1.2, SR 1.3, SR 1.4, SR 1.5, SR 1.6, SR 1.7, SR 1.8, SR 1.9, SR 2.1, SR 2.2, SR 2.3, SR 2.4, SR 2.5, SR 2.6, SR 2.7, A.6.1.2, A.7.1.1, A.9.1.2, A.9.2.1, A.9.2.3, A.9.4.1, A.9.4.4, A.9.4.5, CM-7(a), CM-7(b), CM-6(a), PR.AC-4, PR.AC-6, PR.PT-3 | |
|
Group
Disable All NFS Services if Possible
Group contains 1 group and 1 rule |
[ref]
If there is not a reason for the system to operate as either an
NFS client or an NFS server, follow all instructions in this section to disable
subsystems required by NFS. Warning:
The steps in this section will prevent a system
from operating as either an NFS client or an NFS server. Only perform these
steps on systems which do not need NFS at all. |
Group
Disable Services Used Only by NFS
Group contains 1 rule |
[ref]
If NFS is not needed, disable the NFS client daemons nfslock, rpcgssd, and rpcidmapd.
All of these daemons run with elevated privileges, and many listen for network
connections. If they are not needed, they should be disabled to improve system
security posture. |
Rule
Disable rpcbind Service
[ref] | The rpcbind utility maps RPC services to the ports on which they listen.
RPC processes notify rpcbind when they start, registering the ports they
are listening on and the RPC program numbers they expect to serve. The
rpcbind service redirects the client to the proper port number so it can
communicate with the requested service. If the system does not require RPC
(such as for NFS servers) then this service should be disabled.
The rpcbind service can be disabled with the following command:
$ sudo systemctl disable rpcbind.service
The rpcbind service can be masked with the following command:
$ sudo systemctl mask rpcbind.service | Rationale: | If the system does not require rpc based services, it is recommended that
rpcbind be disabled to reduce the attack surface. | Severity: | low | Rule ID: | xccdf_org.ssgproject.content_rule_service_rpcbind_disabled | Identifiers and References | References:
2.2.7 | |
|